Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an
accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your FIAT brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select
your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play Store and enter the search keyword “FIAT” (U.S.
residents only).
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used under
license by FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC
2022 OWNER’S MANUAL
be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the
legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are
known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To
minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your
vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your
vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual
may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specications, and/
or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet
by calling 1-888-242-6342 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................7
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE .................................................................................14
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................................63
4STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................80
5MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................122
6SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................174
7IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .....................................................................................................218
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................235
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................289
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................294
11INDEX.............................................................................................................................................299
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY...........................................................8
ROLLOVER WARNING .............................................8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.............9
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.................................................9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................... 14
Key Fob .............................................................14
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 17
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 17
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .........................17
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .......................... 18
How To Use Remote Start................................19
To Exit Remote Start Mode..............................19
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped........................................................20
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped .......................................................20
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
And Rear Defrost Activation — If Equipped.....20
Remote Start Cancel Message —
If Equipped........................................................20
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..... 21
To Arm The System .........................................21
To Disarm The System ....................................21
Disabling ...........................................................21
DOORS.....................................................................22
Manual Door Locks ..........................................22
Power Door Locks ............................................22
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
(If Equipped) .....................................................23
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped .............24
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors........................................................24
STEERING WHEEL ..................................................25
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .....25
SEATS ......................................................................26
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats)...................26
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)....................27
Power Adjustment Front Seats —
If Equipped........................................................28
Heated Seats — If Equipped ...........................29
Head Restraints ..............................................30
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION.........................32
Introducing Voice Recognition.........................32
Get Started .......................................................32
Basic Voice Commands ...................................32
Additional Information .....................................32
MIRRORS ...............................................................33
Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................33
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors —
If Equipped .......................................................33
Outside Mirrors ................................................34
Power Mirrors ...................................................34
Folding Mirror ...................................................34
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped ..............35
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..........................35
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 36
Headlight Switch .............................................36
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped ......................................................36
High Beams ......................................................36
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped .......................................................37
Flash-To-Pass ...................................................37
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..............37
Parking Lights...................................................37
Headlight Time Delay ......................................37
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .......................38
Turn Signals......................................................38
Lane Change Assist .........................................38
Courtesy Lights/Approaching Lights...............38
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................. 38
Front Courtesy Light.........................................38
Cargo Area Lights.............................................40
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .............. 40
Windshield Wiper Operation ...........................40
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped................41
Rear Window Wiper/Washer...........................42
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped ........42
CLIMATE CONTROLS ............................................ 43
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ..........................................................43
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ..........................................................46
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...........48
Climate Voice Recognition...............................48
Operating Tips .................................................48
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............... 50
Storage..............................................................50
USB/Media Player Control...............................51
Power Outlets ..................................................52
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped .............................52
Ashtray — If Equipped ......................................52
Grab Handles....................................................53
WINDOWS............................................................... 53
Power Window Controls ...................................53
SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .................................... 55
Opening And Closing The Sunroof...................55
Pinch Protect Feature ......................................55
Venting Sunroof................................................55
Sun Shade ........................................................56
Sunroof Maintenance ......................................56
Emergency Operation.......................................56
Power Sunroof Relearn Procedure..................56
POWER FOLDING ROOF — IF EQUIPPED ............ 57
Opening The Power Folding Roof ....................57
Closing The Power Roof ...................................58
Power Roof Maintenance ................................58
Ignition Off Operation.......................................58
Relearn Procedure ...........................................58
HOOD ...................................................................... 58
To Open The Hood............................................58
To Close The Hood ...........................................59
LIFTGATE .................................................................60
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate...........................60
Lock/Close The Liftgate...................................60
Cargo Area Features ........................................61
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .........................................63
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................64
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .......................64
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons...64
Engine Oil Change Reset — If Equipped .........65
Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu..........65
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ....................69
Red Warning Lights..........................................69
Yellow Warning Lights......................................72
Yellow Indicator Lights.....................................76
Green Indicator Lights .....................................76
White Indicator Lights ......................................77
Blue Indicator Lights ........................................77
Gray Indicator Lights........................................77
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II.........78
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ....................................................78
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS.............................................................78
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE......................................... 80
Tip Start Feature .............................................80
Cold Weather Operation ..................................80
Extended Park Starting....................................80
If Engine Fails To Start ....................................81
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine .......81
Stopping The Engine........................................81
Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped ......82
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .......... 82
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)............................. 82
Auto Park Brake ...............................................84
SafeHold ...........................................................84
Brake Service Mode.........................................84
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .............................. 85
Gear Selector....................................................86
Gear Ranges.....................................................86
Transmission Limp Home Mode .....................89
Ignition Park Interlock......................................89
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System ..............................................................89
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED ........ 90
DYNAMIC SELECTOR — IF EQUIPPED ................. 90
Warning Messages...........................................90
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING .............................. 90
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
STOP/START SYSTEM........................................... 91
Automatic Mode ...............................................91
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop............................................................91
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode .................................................................92
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System ..............................................................92
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System ..............................................................92
System Malfunction .........................................92
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED..... 93
Cruise Control...................................................93
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .........................94
FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED...102
Park Assist Sensors....................................... 103
Park Assist Warning Display ......................... 103
Park Assist Display ........................................ 103
Enabling And Disabling Park Assist.............. 106
Service The Park Assist System ................... 106
Cleaning The Park Assist System................. 106
Park Assist System Usage Precautions ....... 106
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............................108
LaneSense Operation ................................... 108
Turning LaneSense On Or Off....................... 108
LaneSense Warning Message...................... 108
Changing LaneSense Status ........................ 110
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ..............110
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ..................................111
VEHICLE LOADING ..............................................112
Certification Label ......................................... 112
TRAILER TOWING................................................ 113
Common Towing Definitions......................... 113
Trailer Hitch Classification............................ 115
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ............................................. 115
Trailer And Tongue Weight............................ 116
Towing Requirements .................................. 116
Towing Tips .................................................... 118
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME) ..................................................... 119
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ........................................................... 119
DRIVING TIPS....................................................... 119
Driving On Slippery Surfaces........................ 119
Driving Through Water ................................. 120
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ........................................ 122
CYBERSECURITY ................................................ 122
UCONNECT SETTINGS ........................................ 123
Customer Programmable Features.............. 123
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION ............................... 138
System Overview .......................................... 138
Drag & Drop Menu Bar ................................. 140
Safety And General Information................... 140
UCONNECT MODES............................................. 141
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................... 141
Radio Mode .................................................. 142
Media Mode .................................................. 150
Phone Mode ................................................. 152
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................162
Android Auto™
S
........................................ 162
Apple CarPlay® ............................................. 164
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips
And Tricks ...................................................... 166
NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED..................166
Navigation Main Menu ................................. 166
Navigating A Route........................................ 168
Search............................................................ 168
Current Route................................................ 169
My Places....................................................... 171
Parking........................................................... 171
Gas Stations .................................................. 172
Settings.......................................................... 172
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES......173
Regulatory And Safety Information.............. 173
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ..............................................174
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)...................... 174
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ....... 175
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ..........................178
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped ................................................... 178
Full Brake Control System With
Mitigation....................................................... 182
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).... 185
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ....................188
Occupant Restraint Systems ........................ 188
Important Safety Precautions....................... 188
Seat Belt Systems ......................................... 189
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 195
Child Restraints ............................................ 204
SAFETY TIPS.........................................................214
Transporting Passengers.............................. 214
Transporting Pets .......................................... 215
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................... 215
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................................... 216
Exhaust Gas .................................................. 216
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ......................... 217
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .........................218
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........................218
Preparations For Jacking ............................. 218
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage —
If Equipped..................................................... 219
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 220
SEMI–AUTO KIT ...................................................223
Description..................................................... 223
Inflation Procedure........................................ 224
Sealant Cartridge Replacement................... 226
JUMP STARTING.................................................. 226
Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 227
Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 227
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY .............................. 229
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ........................... 229
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ............................. 230
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............................. 231
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ........................ 232
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models...................... 232
Tow Eye Usage — If Equipped ...................... 232
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) .................................................................. 234
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ........................ 234
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE.............................. 235
Maintenance Plan ......................................... 236
ENGINE COMPARTMENT.................................... 240
1.3L Turbo Engine......................................... 240
Checking Oil Level......................................... 241
Adding Washer Fluid ..................................... 241
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 241
Pressure Washing ......................................... 242
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE..................................... 242
Engine Oil ...................................................... 242
Engine Oil Filter ............................................. 243
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............................... 243
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................... 243
Air Conditioner Maintenance........................ 244
Body Lubrication ........................................... 244
Windshield Wiper Blades.............................. 245
Exhaust System ............................................ 246
Cooling System.............................................. 247
Brake System ............................................... 250
Automatic Transmission ............................... 251
FUSES ............................................................ 252
BULB REPLACEMENT.................................... 259
TIRES.....................................................................269
Tire Safety Information ................................. 269
Tires — General Information......................... 276
Tire Types....................................................... 279
Spare Tires — If Equipped............................. 280
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care......................... 282
Snow Traction Devices ................................. 283
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................ 284
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ....................285
Treadwear...................................................... 285
Traction Grades............................................. 285
Temperature Grades..................................... 285
STORING THE VEHICLE .......................................286
BODYWORK..........................................................286
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 286
Body And Underbody Maintenance ............. 286
Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 286
INTERIORS ...........................................................287
Seats And Fabric Parts ................................. 287
Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 287
Leather Surfaces........................................... 288
Glass Surfaces ............................................. 288
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN).........289
BRAKE SYSTEM ...................................................289
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ..289
Torque Specifications ................................... 289
FUEL REQUIREMENTS.........................................290
1.3L Turbo Engine......................................... 290
Reformulated Gasoline................................. 290
Materials Added To Fuel ............................... 290
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ......................... 291
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles.......................................................... 291
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 291
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline...................... 291
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 292
FLUID CAPACITIES...............................................292
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ..................293
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................293
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ........................................... 294
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 294
Prepare A List ................................................ 294
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 294
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................ 294
FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 294
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center............... 294
Mexico............................................................ 294
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands.............. 295
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)......................... 295
Service Contract ........................................... 295
WARRANTY INFORMATION................................295
MOPAR® PARTS .................................................296
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................296
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C............................................ 296
In Canada ...................................................... 296
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................296
GENERAL INFORMATION....................................297
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new FIAT® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This
Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For
this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized
dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about
your satisfaction.
1
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of
gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles
can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is
out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions
that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive
carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of
severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government notes that the universal use
of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each
year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on
a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
each symbol Ú page 69.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 69
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 70
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 70
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 70
Drowsiness Detected Warning Light
Ú page 71
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 71
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 71
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 71
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 71
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 71
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 71
Red Warning Lights
1
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
Transmission Fault Warning Light
Ú page 72
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 72
Trunk Open Warning Light
Ú page 72
Yellow Warning Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 72
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 72
Audio System Failure Light
Ú page 72
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
Ú page 72
Red Warning Lights
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 72
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 73
Drive Mode System Overheating
Ú page 73
Exterior Light Failure Indicator Light
Ú page 73
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light
Ú page 73
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 73
LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 73
Service LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 73
Yellow Warning Lights
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 73
Service Warning Light
Ú page 74
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Ú page 74
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 74
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 75
Drowsiness Detected System Fault Warning Light
Ú page 73
Yellow Indicator Lights
Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light
Ú page 76
Yellow Warning Lights
Full Brake Control System Indicator Light
Ú page 76
Full Brake Control System Off Indicator Light
Ú page 76
Fuel Cutoff Failure Light
Ú page 76
Fuel Cutoff Indicator Light
Ú page 76
Fuel Level Sensor Failure
Ú page 76
Icy Road Condition Indicator Light
Ú page 76
Immobilizer Fail/VPS Electrical Alarm Indicator Light
Ú page 76
Yellow Indicator Lights
1
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
Green Indicator Lights
Sport Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 77
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
Ú page 76
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 76
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 77
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 76
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 77
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 77
White Indicator Lights
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 77
Light Sensor Failure Indicator Light
Ú page 77
Speed Warning Indicator Light
Ú page 77
Sport Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 77
Idle Coasting Indicator Light
Ú page 77
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), and
Remote Start (if equipped). The key fob allows you
to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate
the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system. The key fob also contains an emergency
key, which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the
key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop,
or other electronic device. This may result in poor
performance.
Keyless Ignition Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be
verified by referring to the instrument cluster,
which will display directions to follow Ú page 297.
To Unlock/Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five
seconds to unlock all the doors and the liftgate. To
lock all the doors and the liftgate, push the lock
button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
flash and the illuminated entry system will be
activated. When the doors are locked, the turn
signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked by a key fob, and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock
and if equipped, the security system will arm.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 123.
Key Left Vehicle Feature — If Equipped
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the
vehicle while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the
ON/RUN or START position, the message “Key Left
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster
display along with an interior chime. An exterior
audible and visual alert will also be activated to
warn the driver.
1 — Unlock
2 — Emergency Key
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — PANIC
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times
along with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior
lights.
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in
order for the vehicle to check for the presence of
a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle feature will not
activate until all of the doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations
where the vehicle’s engine is left running with
the key fob inside.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery dimensions may not meet the original
OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding the
emergency key release (1) on the back of the
key fob and pulling the emergency key out
with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separate the key fob halves using a #2 flat
blade screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry the
two halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not
to damage the seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
Separating Case With A Coin
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3. Remove the back cover to access and replace
the battery. When replacing the battery, match
the (+) sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the
inside of the battery clip, located on the back
cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your
fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterio-
ration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never
been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
match the vehicle locks.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
in just two hours and can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from chil-
dren. If the battery compartment does not
close securely, stop using the product and
keep it away from children.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™, always remember to place the
ignition in the OFF position.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed or
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
incorrect key fob is used to start the engine.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains
on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates
that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible by an authorized
dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 297.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has three
operating positions. These positions are OFF, ON,
and RUN.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following positions:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
No electrical devices are available.
ON
The vehicle is not running.
Some electrical devices (power locks, alarm,
etc.) are still available.
RUN
Driving mode.
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, heated seats, etc).
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket Remote Start
systems. Use of these systems may result in
vehicle starting problems and loss of security
protection.
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
NOTE:
The vehicle will not start if the key fob is located
inside the cargo area and the liftgate is opened.
Backup Starting Method
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or depleted
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be
used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose
side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
key fob against the START/STOP ignition button
and push to operate the ignition switch.
NOTE:
For more information on proper engine starting
procedures, see Ú page 80.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of approximately
328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the driver enters the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN posi-
tion. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle. Pushing
the Remote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10
seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion before the Remote Start sequence can be
repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will remote start:
Gear Selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous Remote
Start event
Vehicle Security Light flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intru-
sion
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illumi-
nated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, push and release the START/STOP ignition
button while pressing the brake pedal prior to the
end of the 15 minute cycle.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off
with another push and release of the Remote Start
button on the key fob, or if the engine is allowed to
run for the entire 15 minute cycle. Once the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
climate controls will resume the previously set
operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP ignition
button.
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
system will automatically activate front defrost for
15 minutes or less. The timing is dependent on the
ambient temperature. Once the timer expires, the
system will automatically adjust the settings
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next
section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat
feature will turn on if selected in the comfort menu
screen within Uconnect Settings Ú page 123. The
vehicle will adjust the climate control settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
The climate controls will be automatically adjusted
to the optimal temperature and mode settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
This will occur until the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN position where the climate controls will
resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based
on the last settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to MAX
A/C, Bi-Level Mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 43.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start until the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN position. The climate control settings will
change if manually adjusted by the driver while the
vehicle is in Remote Start mode, and exit auto-
matic override. This includes the OFF button on the
climate controls, which will turn the system off.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E–ICER AND REAR DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C),
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer
and operation will continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE —
I
F EQUIPPED
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote
start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle
doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the
Vehicle Security system is armed, interior switches
for door locks and liftgate release are disabled. If
something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security
system will provide the following audible and
visible signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument
cluster will flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior power
door lock switch with the driver and/or
passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob avail-
able in the same exterior zone Ú page 23.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using
any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
the door Ú page 23.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed
during liftgate entry. If someone enters the
vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door,
the alarm will sound.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock
the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has
occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm,
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash,
and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
DISABLING
To completely disable the alarm (e.g. in the case of
long inactivity of the car), lock the doors by turning
the emergency key in the exterior door lock
cylinder.
NOTE:
If the batteries in the key fob discharge in the event
of a failure to the system or to switch off the alarm,
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
To lock each door from the inside, rotate the door
lock button on each door trim panel forward. To
unlock the doors from the inside, pull the inside
door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
lock button until the lock symbol is no longer
visible.
If the lock symbol is visible when the door is shut,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob
is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Lock/Unlock Switch
NOTE:
The manual lock knob unlocks each individual
door separately.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on each
front door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock
the doors and liftgate.
Push the lock button on the driver or passenger
door trim panel to lock the doors.
With the doors locked, push the unlock button to
unlock the doors.
Power Lock/Unlock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry system (if
equipped).
1 — Door Unlocked
2 — Door Locked
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
the ON/RUN position. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation. Always remove
the key from the ignition and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
E
NTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a
feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™. This feature
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s)
without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
through Uconnect Settings Ú page 123.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device;
these devices may interfere with the key fob’s
wireless signal and prevent the Passive Entry
system from locking and unlocking the vehicle.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a
slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry
door handle, and no door goes ajar within
60 seconds, the vehicle will relock and if
equipped, the Vehicle Security system will arm.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door
handle will unlock the driver’s door automatically.
Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock all
doors and the liftgate automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door
handle, depending on the selected setting in the
Uconnect system Ú page 123.
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle,
the Passive Entry system is equipped with an
automatic door unlock feature.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive
Entry. There are three situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry
key fob while a door is ajar.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is ajar.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is ajar.
When any of these situations occur, after all ajar
doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be
executed. If it detects a Passive Entry key fob
inside the car, and it does not detect any Passive
Entry key fobs outside the car, then the car will
unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry key fob is
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not
unlock the doors when any of the following condi-
tions are met:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handles,
pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock the
vehicle.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using any Passive Entry door handle.
This is to allow you to check if the vehicle is
locked by pulling the door handle without the
vehicle unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is depleted.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the
lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door
panel.
Activation/Deactivation Of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ can be activated or
deactivated through the instrument cluster display
or through the Uconnect system Ú page 297.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When the auto door lock feature is enabled, if all of
the doors are closed properly, the door locks will
lock automatically when the vehicle's speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h). The auto door lock
feature is enabled/disabled within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 123.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children
riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat
blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate
the dial to the lock or unlock position. When the
system on a door is engaged, that door can only be
opened by using the outside door handle even if
the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can only be opened by using
the outside door handle even though the inside
door lock is in the unlocked position.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the unlocked posi-
tion.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
rotate the lock button to the unlocked position,
roll down the window, and open the door with
the outside door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to open a
door with the internal handle. Once the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, it is
impossible to open the doors from inside the
vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be sure to
check that there is no one left inside.
STEERING WHEEL
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The tilt/
telescoping lever is located below the steering
wheel at the end of the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the tilt/
telescoping lever downward (toward the floor). To
tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired.
To lock the steering column in position, pull the tilt/
telescoping lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be
opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection locks are engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
of the vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS)
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with manual seats.
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by
using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion,
near the floor.
Manual Seat Adjustment Levers
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located
under the seat cushion and move the seat forward
or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat
to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could
be injured. Adjust the seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally
injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle
is parked.
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
2 — Seat Height Adjustment Lever (If Equipped)
3 — Recline Lever
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The front driver and passenger seats height can be
raised or lowered by using a lever, located on the
outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever
to raise the seat height or push downward on the
lever to lower the seat height.
Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the
seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release
the lever.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
Manual Folding Second Row Seat
The manual folding split rear seat increases the
storage of the rear cargo area.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat down, it may be
necessary to position the front seat to its
mid-track position. Be sure that the front seats
are fully upright and positioned forward, this will
allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and by simply unfolding the seats
to the open position, over time the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape.
Cargo Area Enlargement
Folding both sides of the rear seat provides
additional storage in the rear cargo area.
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped).
2. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
3. Move the safety belts to the outboard side of
the seat.
4. Pull the seatback release lever to fold both
sides of the rear seatbacks completely
forward.
Partial Enlargement Of The Cargo Area
Enlargement of the left side of the cargo area
allows you to carry a single passenger on the right
side of the rear seat, while the enlargement of the
right side allows you to carry two passengers.
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped).
2. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
3. Move the safety belts to the outboard side of
the seat and rest them on the seat belt guide.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top
of the seatback. This could impair visibility or
become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop
or collision.
WARNING!
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Pull the seatback release lever to fold the left
or right rear seatback completely forward.
Seatback Release Lever
Seatback Repositioning
NOTE:
If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty
returning the seat to its proper position.
1. Move the safety belts to the seat belt guides
on the top edge of the seat to ensure the
seatbacks properly latch.
2. Lift the seatbacks, pushing them back until
they lock on both the latches. Verify the red
notches are no longer visible on the release
lever. If the red notches are visible, the
seatback is not secure.
Rear Seat Latch
POWER ADJUSTMENT FRONT SEATS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the seat.
Use the switch to move the seat up/down,
forward/rearward, tilt (if equipped) and to set the
angle of the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
NOTE:
The power seat adjustment switches can only be
used when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position
and for 20 minutes after the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. The devices will automatically be
deactivated when the ignition is in the OFF position
if the vehicle is locked from the outside.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by using the power seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been
reached.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked
into position. If the seatback is not securely
locked into position the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or
passengers. An improperly latched seat could
cause serious injury.
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Recline Switch
3 — Power Lumbar Switch
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
(Continued)
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down
by using the power seat switch. The seat will move
in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up
or down using the power seat switch. The front of
the seat cushion will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward.
The seatback will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger
seats may also be equipped with power lumbar.
The power lumbar switch is located on the
outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch
forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the
switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support.
Pushing upward or downward on the switch will
raise and lower the position of the support.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
The heated seat switches are located on
the instrument panel.
You can choose between two heating levels:
Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second time to
turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time to turn
the heating elements off.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 145 minutes of continuous
operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level
setting will turn off automatically after
approximately 60 minutes.
NOTE:
The timing may vary based on environmental
temperature.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 20.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
WARNING!
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
so that the top of the head restraint is located
above the top of your ear.
Front Adjustment
Your vehicle is equipped with driver and passenger
head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located on the base of the
head restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
Front Head Restraint
Rear Adjustment
Your vehicle is equipped with two outboard head
restraints and one center head restraint for its rear
passengers. The rear head restraints can be raised
or lowered. When the center seat is being
occupied, the head restraint should be in the
raised position. When there are no occupants in
the center seat, the head restraint can be lowered
for maximum visibility for the driver.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
Rear Head Restraint
Front Removal
To remove the head restraint recline the backrest
of the seat to avoid interference with the roof.
Raise the head restraint as far as it can go then
push the release button and adjustment button at
the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the
head restraint posts into the holes and push
downward. Then adjust it to the appropriate height.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain addi-
tional clearance to the back of the head.
Rear Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and
adjustment button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then adjust it to the
appropriate height.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain addi-
tional clearance to the back of the head.
1 — Adjustment Button
2 — Release Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head restraints
in a location outside the occupant compart-
ment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head restraints
in a location outside the occupant compart-
ment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat.
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
Commands and tips you need to know to control
your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate /deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push
the VR button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc Ú page 297.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin
Radio, Media, And Climate Functions
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on
the view through the rear window. Headlight glare
from vehicles behind you can be reduced by
moving the lever under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the lever under the mirror
is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Mirror Lever
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the
feature on or off by pushing the button at the base
of the mirror. A light to the left of the button will
illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is
activated. The sensor to the right of the button
does not illuminate.
Automatic Dimming Button
NOTE:
This feature is disabled when the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on each sun
visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down
and swing the mirror cover upward. The lights will
turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover will
turn the light off.
Vanity Mirror Light
Sun Visors “Slide-On-Rod” Feature
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to
block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional sun
blockage.
NOTE:
The sun visor blade can also be extended while the
sun visor is against the windshield for additional
sun blockage through the front of the vehicle.
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center
of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the
optimal view.
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
To adjust the mirror, rotate the mirror selection
switch to the left or to the right and then push the
mirror adjustment switch in the four directions
indicated by arrows.
NOTE:
To adjust the power mirrors, the ignition must be
in the ON/RUN position.
Once the mirror is adjusted, rotate the control to
the neutral position to avoid accidental move-
ments.
The power mirror switches will remain active for
up to three minutes after the ignition is placed
in the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
Power Mirror Switch
FOLDING MIRROR
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror
to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage.
The mirror has three detent positions: full forward,
normal and full rearward.
Folding Exterior Mirror
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on side
convex mirrors could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
1 — Mirror Selector Switch
2 — Mirror Adjustment Switch
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
POWER FOLDING MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
If equipped, the outside mirrors can be folded
using the power folding mirror switch, located on
the driver’s door trim panel. The power mirror
switch will operate with the ignition in the ON/RUN
position, and for three minutes after the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. This feature will disable
if either front door is opened.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
To fold the outside mirrors, push the power folding
mirror switch. Push the switch a second time to
unfold the mirrors to the driving position. Any push
of the power folding mirror switch will reverse the
operation.
Power Folding Mirrors
NOTE:
The outside mirrors must always be in the unfolded
position when the vehicle is in motion, except
when driving through narrow locations.
Automatic Power Folding Mirrors
When the Automatic Fold Mirrors feature is
enabled, the exterior mirrors will fold in when
exiting the vehicle (the ignition is OFF, all doors are
closed, and the doors are locked).
If the exterior mirrors were auto-folded, they will
unfold when the ignition is placed in the ON
position or when the doors are unlocked.
If the exterior mirrors were manually folded,
they will not automatically unfold.
NOTE:
The Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 123.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 43.
1 — Mirror Selector Switch
2 — Mirror Adjustment Switch
3 — Power Folding Mirror Switch
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. The headlight switch
controls the operation of the headlights, parking
lights, daytime running lights, fog lights and the
dimming of the instrument cluster and interior
lighting.
Headlight Switch
Turning on the headlights will illuminate the
instrument cluster and the controls located on the
instrument panel.
NOTE:
On vehicles sold in Canada, both the rear position
lights and Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn
on when the headlight switch is rotated to the
O (off) position.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs), if enabled
through Uconnect Settings, will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and the
park brake is not applied.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when
the hazard warning lights are activated).
HIGH BEAMS
To activate the high beam headlights, push the
multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the
vehicle), and an indicator will illuminate in the
instrument cluster display.
To deactivate the high beam headlights, pull the
multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of
the vehicle).
High Beam And Turn Signal Controls
NOTE:
The headlights must be on for the high beams to
activate.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Ambient Lighting Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Front Fog Light Switch
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at night
by automating high beam control through the use
of a digital camera mounted on the windshield.
This camera detects vehicle specific light and
automatically switches from high beams to low
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off through Uconnect
Settings Ú page 123.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
cause the system to function improperly.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
and remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights on
or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the
system on, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to
the last detent (AUTO position) for automatic
headlight operation. To turn the automatic system
off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE:
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN or START
position before the headlights will come on in the
automatic mode.
Light Sensor
The light sensor is equipped with an infrared LED,
located on the windshield. It detects changes in
light intensity outside the vehicle, based on the
sensitivity of light set by using the menu on the
display or on the Uconnect system.
The higher the sensitivity, the lesser the amount of
external light required for controlling the lighting.
PARKING LIGHTS
Rotate the headlight switch to the first position to
turn on the parking lights. The parking light
indicator in the cluster will illuminate.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY
This feature provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving
your vehicle in an unlit area.
The time delay of the headlights is programmable
between 0, 30, 60 and 90 seconds within
Uconnect Settings Ú page 123.
Headlight Delay Activation
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in
the OFF position while the headlights are still on.
Then, turn off the headlights within two minutes.
The delay interval begins when the headlight
switch is turned off.
Headlight Delay Deactivation
The feature is disabled by turning on the
headlights, the parking lights or by placing the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
If you shut off the lights before the ignition is
turned on, they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The lights must be turned off within two minutes of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate
this feature.
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
Front Fog Light Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the fog
light button on the headlight switch. To turn off the
front fog lights, push the headlight switch a second
time or turn off the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster
illuminates when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. Selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
The fog lights also function as cornering lights.
Therefore there will be times when only one light
is on.
If the ignition is placed in the OFF position with
the fog lights on, they will remain on when the
ignition is placed back in the ON/RUN position.
For vehicles sold in Canada, if the selector is
moved to the parking lights position and the
front fog lights are activated, the DRL will be
deactivated and the front parking lights will be
activated. Once the front fog lights are deacti-
vated, the DRL will be activated again.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side
of the instrument cluster display flash to show
proper operation.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash five times then automatically turn
off.
COURTESY LIGHTS/APPROACHING
L
IGHTS
The courtesy lights feature allows you to activate
the low beam, parking lights, and side marker
lights for 25 seconds when the vehicle is unlocked.
The courtesy lights feature can be activated or
deactivated through the Uconnect Settings. When
a door is open with the feature active, the
activation of the lights is extended for 10 seconds.
The feature is disabled when the vehicle is locked
or when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
FRONT COURTESY LIGHT
The courtesy lights will automatically turn on when
the door is open or closed. The light switches in the
overhead console are for reading lamps.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
1 — Courtesy/Reading Lights
2 — Light Switches
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Push the driver or passenger light switch to
operate the reading lamps individually.
NOTE:
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
interior lights are turned off. This will prevent the
battery from discharging once the doors are
closed.
If a light is left on it will automatically be turned
off after approximately 15 minutes after the
ignition is in the OFF position.
Dome Light Timing
The dome light will automatically illuminate when
the doors are unlocked, the doors are opened or
after the doors are closed.
Timing Entering The Vehicle
The dome lights illuminate in the following ways:
When the doors are unlocked, the dome light
will illuminate for approximately 27 seconds.
When one of the doors is opened, the dome light
will illuminate for approximately three minutes.
When the doors are closed, the dome light will
automatically shut off after approximately
27 seconds.
NOTE:
The timing stops once the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
The dome light will turn off under any of the
following conditions:
The dome light is disabled when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
The dome lights will turn off automatically when
the doors are locked.
The dome lights will automatically turn off after
approximately 15 minutes of inactivity to
preserve the battery.
Timing Exiting The Vehicle
The dome light will illuminate under the following
conditions when the ignition is placed in the OFF
position:
The dome light will illuminate for 27 seconds
after the key is removed from the vehicle.
The opening of one of the doors (approximately
three minutes).
After closing a door (approximately 27 seconds).
The dome light timing is disabled when the doors
are locked.
Dimmer Controls
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the brightness
of the ambient light located in the overhead
console, lower instrument panel lights, and cubby
bin lights.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate the
instrument panel dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the brightness
of the instrument panel. At the top detent of the
instrument panel dimmer, all the interior lights will
also illuminate. At the bottom most setting of the
thumb wheel, all the interior lights will be turned to
their lowest dimmable setting.
Headlight Switch
1 — Ambient Light Control (If Equipped)
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Dome Light — If Equipped
Push the switch on the rear dome light once to turn
the light on, the light will remain on at all times.
Push the switch a second time to turn the light off,
the light will remain off until a door is opened.
Rear Dome Light On/Off Switch
Retractable Roof Lights
For vehicles equipped with a retractable roof, there
are two interior lights located below the grab
handles of the rear doors.
The lights come on by opening any of the doors.
CARGO AREA LIGHTS
An interior light is located on the left side panel in
the cargo area.
This light automatically turns on/off when the
liftgate is opened and closed, regardless of the
position of the ignition.
NOTE:
In order to preserve the life of the battery, the light
will turn off after 15 minutes.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located
on the lever on the right side of the steering
column. The front wipers are operated by rotating
a switch, located on the end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper Lever
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the windshield wiper knob to one of the first
two detent positions for intermittent settings, the
third detent for low wiper operation and the fourth
for high wiper operation.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and
hold. If the lever is pulled while in the intermittent
setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for
several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and
then resume the intermittent interval previously
selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate for several wipe
cycles, then turn off.
1 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Pull For Front Washer
5 — Push Up For Mist
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the “park” position. If the windshield
wiper switch is turned off, and the blades cannot
return to the “park” position, damage to the
wiper motor may occur.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Mist
Push the lever upward to the Mist position and
release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the windshield. The wash function must be used in
order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 245.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses moisture on the windshield
and automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to one of two detent
positions for intermittent settings to activate this
feature.
NOTE:
If the windshield wiper lever is rotated from the O
(off) position to the first intermittent setting or from
the first intermittent setting to the second inter-
mittent setting, the wipers will perform an imme-
diate wipe cycle to clean the windshield.
Rain Sensor Location
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with
the windshield wiper lever. Wiper delay position
one is the least sensitive, and wiper delay position
two is the most sensitive. Place the wiper switch in
the O (off) position when not using the system.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when
the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed posi-
tion.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop-
erly when ice or dried salt water is present on
the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or sili-
cone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and
off through Uconnect Settings Ú page 123.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features
for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate
under the following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition
is first placed in the ON/RUN position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the wiper
switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position, and the auto-
matic transmission is in the NEUTRAL position,
the Rain Sensing system will not operate until
the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear
selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with the Remote Start system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has
been selected, and no other inhibit conditions
exist.
Rain Sensing Wipers — Inhibition — When the
user changes the ignition position from OFF to
ON/RUN with the windshield wiper lever already
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
in the intermittent position, no wipe cycle is
performed for safety reasons. This temporary
inhibition avoids accidental activations of the
wiping (e.g. during the hand washing of the
windshield, blocking the blades in ice/snow
conditions).
The user can activate the Rain Sensing Wipers in
three ways:
Moving the lever from the O (off) position to the
intermittent positions.
One Mist command actuation.
The vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h) and
the rain sensor detects the presence of rain.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper lever on the right side of the
steering column. The rear wiper/washer is
operated by rotating a switch, located at the
middle of the lever.
NOTE:
If the front wiper is moving and the vehicle is
shifted in REVERSE, the rear wiper will perform one
round up to clean the rear window.
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the first detent for intermittent
operation and to the second detent for
continuous rear wiper operation.
To use the washer, push the lever
forward and hold while spray is desired. If
the lever is pushed while in the
intermittent setting, the wiper will turn on
and operate for several wipe cycles after the end of
the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 30 seconds. Once the
lever is released, the pump will resume normal
operation.
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off
position, the wiper will operate for several wipe
cycles, then turn off.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the wiper will
automatically return to the “park” position.
WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield
Wiper De-Icer feature that may be activated under
the following conditions:
Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will be activated automatically
when the rear defrost is turned on and the
ambient temperature is below 40°F (4.4°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation — When
Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C), the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
Remote Start will resume its previous operation.
If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the
timer and operation will continue.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
CAUTION!
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
located on the touchscreen (if equipped) and on
the instrument panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Automatic Climate Controls
MAX A/C Setting
MAX A/C sets the system for maximum
cooling performance. Rotate the driver
temperature control adjust knob
counterclockwise for MAX A/C. Both
driver and passenger temperature displays will
show MAX A/C LO. In MAX A/C, the blower speed
and mode position can be adjusted to desired user
settings. Pressing other settings will cause the
MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected setting
and MAX A/C to exit.
A/C Button
Push the A/C Control button to change
the current setting. The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on. Pushing the
AUTO control button will cause the A/C
operation to change to AUTO mode and the A/C
indicator will turn off.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the air
conditioning system. When the air conditioning
system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow
through the outlets into the cabin. For improved
fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the
air conditioning and manually adjust the blower
and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to
select only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an
accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle
water spray from the front of the radiator and
through the condenser.
SYNC Button
Push the Sync button to toggle the Sync
feature on/off. The Sync indicator
illuminates when Sync is on. Sync
synchronizes the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while
in Sync mode will automatically exit this feature
and return to the separate management of air
temperatures in the two zones.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change
the system between Recirculation mode
and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator illuminates when Recirculation
is on. Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in
all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended. Recirculation
mode may automatically adjust to optimize
customer experience for warming, cooling,
dehumidification, etc.
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield.
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press
AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain
your desired temperature by
automatically adjusting the blower speed
and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly
recommended for efficiency. Air Conditioning (A/C)
may be active during AUTO operation to improve
performance. Push the button on the faceplate to
turn AUTO on. The AUTO indicator illuminates when
AUTO is on. Toggling this function will cause the
system to switch between manual mode and
automatic mode Ú page 48.
MAX Defrost Button
Push the MAX Defrost button to change
the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The MAX Defrost indicator
illuminates when MAX Defrost is on.
Performing this function will cause the automatic
climate controls to change to manual mode. The
blower speed increases to full (all LEDs on) when
MAX Defrost mode is selected, the air conditioning
compressor is turned on (LED on), both driver and
passenger temperature controls are set to (HI),
defrost mode is selected (LED on), rear defroster is
turned on (LED on) and the air recirculation is
turned off (LED off). If the MAX Defrost mode is
turned off, the climate system will return to the
previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push the Rear Defrost button to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear
Defrost indicator illuminates when the
rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after 20 minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Knobs
The passenger temperature knob provides the
passenger with independent temperature control.
The driver temperature knob provides the driver
with independent temperature control. Rotate the
adjustment knob to set the desired temperature.
Rotating the temperature knob clockwise
increases the temperature.
Rotating the temperature knob
counterclockwise decreases the
temperature.
The set temperature is shown on the display.
Turning the temperature knob completely in one
direction or the other activates the HI (maximum
heating) or LO (maximum cooling) functions shown
in the display, respectively. Rotate the driver
temperature knob fully counterclockwise for
maximum A/C (LO).
To deactivate these functions, turn the
temperature knob to the desired temperature.
NOTE:
Rotating the passenger temperature control knob
while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Blower Control Knob
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. Adjusting the blower will
cause automatic mode to switch to
manual operation. The speeds can be selected by
rotating the Blower Control adjustment knob.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
buttons to change the airflow distribution
mode. The airflow distribution mode can
be adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets and demist outlets.
Front Defrost Button
Push and release the button on the
faceplate to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The Front
Defrost indicator illuminates when Front
Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield and
side window demist outlets. When the defrost
button is selected, the blower level may increase.
Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature
settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front
defrost mode button, the Climate Control system
will return to the previous setting.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut-off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode is obtained by pressing
both the Panel Mode button and the
Floor Mode button, activating them both.
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level Mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode is obtained by pressing both
the Windshield Mode button and the
Floor Mode button, activating them both.
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that require
extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture
on the windshield.
Hi-Level Mode
Hi-Level Mode is obtained by pushing the
Defrost Mode button and the Panel Mode
button. Air comes from the instrument
panel outlets and the defrost outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed through the side
window demister outlets.
Tri-Level Mode
Tri-Level Mode is obtained by pressing
the Defrost Mode button, the Panel Mode
button, and the Floor Mode button. Air
comes from the instrument panel
outlets, the defrost outlets, and floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed through the side
window demister outlets.
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Climate Control Power Button
Press and release the Climate Control
Power button to turn the Climate Control
on/off.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Manual Climate Controls
MAX A/C Setting
Set the temperature control knob to the
MAX A/C setting to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air.
Moving the temperature control knob
away from the MAX A/C setting causes the MAX
A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in
Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for
an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a
gentle water spray from the front of the radiator
and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Push the Recirculation button to change
the system between recirculation mode
and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate
when the Recirculation button is pressed.
Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in
all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be
unavailable if conditions exist that could create
fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C
can be deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if
equipped, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in
Defrost mode to improve window clearing
operation. Recirculation is disabled automatically
if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in
the control button to blink and then turns off.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the mode control knob to the Front
Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings
for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost
Control button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after 20 minutes.
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of
the air forced through the climate system.
The temperature increases as you turn
the temperature control knob clockwise.
The temperature decreases as you turn
the temperature control knob
counterclockwise.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of
air forced through the climate control
system. There are seven blower speeds
available. The blower speed increases as
you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed
decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob to adjust
airflow distribution. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut-off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Climate Control OFF
To turn the Climate Controls off, turn the
blower control knob to the OFF (O)
position.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC panel
and the word “AUTO” will illuminate in the
front ATC display, along with two
temperatures for the driver and front
passenger. The system will then automat-
ically regulate the amount of airflow.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain, by adjusting the driver,
and passenger temperatures. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system
will achieve and automatically maintain that
comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings. The system automatically adjusts the
temperature, mode, and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
automatic mode, during cold start-ups, the blower
fan will remain on low until the engine warms up.
The fan will engage immediately if the Defrost
mode is selected, or by changing the front blower
knob setting.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system is
being used in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of
the following commands:
“
Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature of
your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see Ú page 286.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods,
as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution
box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed.
System Maintenance
In Winter, the Climate Control system must be
turned on at least once a month for approximately
10 minutes.
Have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
before the Summer.
NOTE:
The system uses R-1234yf (refrigerant) which does
not pollute the environment in the event of acci-
dental leakage. Under no circumstances is the use
of R-134a (refrigerant) allowed.
Rapid Window Demisting (MAX-Defrost
Function)
Push the MAX-defrost button to activate (LED on)
the windshield and side window demisting
function.
The Climate Control system carries out the
following operations:
Turns on the air conditioning compressor when
environmental conditions are suitable
Turns air recirculation off
Sets blower fan to the maximum speed and
displays the fan speed (Blower Control Indicator
LED illuminated)
Directs air flow to windshield and front side
window diffusers
Activates the heated rear window defrost
Activates the heated windshield (if equipped)
When the function is activated, the AUTO button
LED turns off. With the function activated, the only
possible manual adjustments are pushing the A/C
control button, adjusting the fan speed and turning
the heated rear window off.
When the Recirculation Control or AUTO buttons
are pushed, the Climate Control system will
deactivate the Front Defrost (MAX-DEF) function.
Selecting the footwell/windshield or only
windshield distribution activates the Climate
Control system compressor and the air
recirculation is set to outside air intake.
This logic guarantees optimum visibility at the
windows. Max-defrost is also available in manual
mode.
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Climate Control System Compressor
Push the A/C Control button to activate/deactivate
the compressor (activation is indicated by the LED
on the button turning on).
The system remembers that the compressor has
been turned off, even after the engine has
stopped.
Pushing the A/C button will stop AUTO mode (AUTO
LED will turn off). To restore automatic control of
compressor, push the AUTO button again.
NOTE:
With the compressor off, air cannot be introduced
to the passenger compartment with a temperature
lower than the outside temperature. Under certain
environmental conditions, windows could fog
rapidly since the air is not dehumidified.
Operating Tips Chart
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartments
The glove compartments are located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Glove Compartments
To open the upper compartment, push in the
button located on the bottom side of the upper
door. The door will automatically open.
To close the upper compartment, push downward
on the door's surface to latch the door closed.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull
outward on the latch and lower the glove
compartment door.
NOTE:
Do not insert objects in the glove compartments
that will not allow the compartment to fully
close.
The glove compartments should be completely
closed while the vehicle is in motion.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode),
(MAX A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for a
minute to flush out the
hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Mix Mode) and
turn (A/C) on to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix
Mode).
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
1 — Upper Glove Compartment Release Button
2 — Lower Glove Compartment Release Handle
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Front Armrest
The front armrest is located between the front
seats.
If your vehicle is equipped with an adjustable
armrest, the armrest can be adjusted by moving it
in the direction indicated by the arrows.
Front Armrest Handle
Storage Compartment
Push the storage handle and lift up the armrest to
access the storage compartment.
USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL
Located below the heating ventilation and air
conditioning controls is the front USB ports.
Front USB Ports
This feature allows an external device to be
plugged into the USB port.
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only
USB ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into
a Media USB port, a message will display on the
touchscreen that the device is not supported by
the system.
Rear Center Console USB Port
A third, charge only USB port is located on the back
of the center console.
Rear Center Console USB Port — If Equipped
NOTE:
Depending on vehicle configuration, the USB port
may be charge only or media file capable.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER OUTLETS
There is one 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet in this
vehicle, located under the climate controls. This
power outlet can power mobile phones, electronics
and other low power devices.
This power outlet is located in front of the gear
selector.
12 Volt Power Outlet
NOTE:
The power outlet can be changed to “battery”
powered at all times by switching the power outlet
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit fuse
from location F84 to F23.
NOTE:
Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded,
the fuse protecting the system will need to be
replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow
the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your new vehicle
warranty.
Power Outlet Fuse Location:
F84 Fuse 20A Yellow Instrument Panel Power
Outlet.
CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED
The cigar lighter is located on the instrument
panel, below the climate controls. To activate the
cigar lighter, push and release the knob. After a
few seconds the knob automatically returns to its
initial position, and the cigar lighter is ready for
use.
NOTE:
Always check that the cigar lighter is switched
off.
Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 W to the socket. Do not damage the socket
by using unsuitable adapters.
ASHTRAY — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Ashtrays can be purchased at an authorized dealer
through Mopar® parts.
The ashtray is a plastic container that can be
placed into one of the cup holders.
Ashtray Location
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very
hot. To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar
lighter with care. Always check that the cigar
lighter has turned off.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
GRAB HANDLES
The grab handles are located immediately above
the doors. The rear handles are equipped with
hooks for dress hangers.
Rear Grab Handle Assembly
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The window controls on the driver's door control all
the door windows.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be operated
by using the single window controls on the
passenger door trim panel. The window controls
will operate only when the ignition is in the ON/
RUN position.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for
up to three minutes after the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
Automatic Window Features
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the
window switch down for a short period of time,
then release, and the window will go down
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly when the window has
reached the desired position.
1 — Grab Handle
2 — Hook
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power windows.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by
the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up for a short period of time
and release; the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, pull up or push down
on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go
back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
window switch again to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch
lightly and hold to close the window manually.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature be interrupted and
stop working, the feature will need to be reset. To
reset Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up
for an additional two seconds after the
window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open
the window completely and continue to hold
the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
NOTE:
All doors must be closed before beginning the
Auto-Up reset procedure.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on
the rear passenger doors. To disable the window
controls, push and release the window lockout
button (the indicator light on the switch will turn
on). To enable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout switch again (the
indicator light on the switch will turn off).
Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down, or the sunroof (if
equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be
minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting
occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
WARNING!
There is no auto-reverse protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers
and all objects from the window path before
closing.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The sunroof has two glass panels (the front one is
operational and the rear one fixed) and is
equipped with two manual operated sunshades,
front and rear.
The power sunroof can be operated only when the
ignition is placed in ON/RUN.
The power sunroof switches are located in the
overhead console.
Operation Switch
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
To retract the front panel to the open position,
push the open/close switch and the sunroof will
fully open. The sunroof can be stopped in any
position by pushing the switch a second time while
is opening.
To close the front panel completely, pull the open/
close switch from the open position. The sunroof
can be stopped in any position by pulling the
sunroof switch a second time while it is closing.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
VENTING SUNROOF
To vent the sunroof, push the vent switch.
NOTE:
The vent switch has the automatic function only at
the opening of the sunroof. During the closing of
the sunroof, the switch must be held until closed.
1 — Front Panel Open/Close Switch
2 — Front Panel Vent Switch
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a loca-
tion accessible to children. Occupants, partic-
ularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the power sunroof while oper-
ating the power sunroof switch. Such entrap-
ment may result in serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are properly
secured too.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
parts, or any object to project through the
sunroof opening. Injury may result.
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SUN SHADE
The two sun shades are manually operated and
can be adjusted in any position.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
clear out any debris that may have collected in the
tracks.
EMERGENCY OPERATION
If the power sunroof switch fails, the sunroof can
be operated manually as follows:
1. Remove the protective cap located on the
inner lining.
2. Remove the Allen Key that is supplied in the
tool bag in the cargo area.
3. Insert the Allen Key into the key hole and turn
it clockwise to open the roof or
counter-clockwise to close.
Allen Key And Key Hole
POWER SUNROOF RELEARN
P
ROCEDURE
As a result of any abnormal behavior of the roof or
as a result of an emergency operation, and you
must relearn the automatic operation of the
sunroof.
Proceed as follows:
1. Push the open/close button to move the roof
in the fully closed position.
2. Place the ignition in the OFF position and wait
for at least 10 seconds.
3. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
4. Pull the open/close button and hold it for at
least 10 seconds, after which you should feel
the mechanical stop of the electric motor of
the roof.
5. Within five seconds, pull to close and hold the
open/close button. The roof makes a complete
cycle of opening and closing automatically (to
indicate that the relearn procedure has been
successful). If this does not happen, you need
to repeat the procedure from the beginning.
1 — Allen Key
2 — Key Hole
CAUTION!
When refitting sunroof, be careful to avoid
fingers, scarves, ties and items of clothing
from getting caught under the panel.
Do not open the roof in the presence of snow
or ice. There is risk of damage.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
POWER FOLDING ROOF — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with a Power Folding
Roof, the control switch can be found on the
overhead console.
Power Folding Roof Open/Close Switch
NOTE:
The Power Folding Roof is non-removable.
The Power Folding Roof will not open in
temperatures below -2°F (-18°C) or above
176°F (80°C).
The Power Folding Roof will not operate at
vehicle speeds above 62 mph (100 km/h).
NOTE:
A slight pause in audio may be heard when
opening and closing the Power Folding Roof as a
result of the Uconnect system switching between
Power Roof Closed and Power Roof Open audio
modes.
OPENING THE POWER FOLDING ROOF
Express Mode
Push the open/close switch and release it within
one-half second and the power roof will open
automatically from any position. The power roof
will open fully and stop automatically. Push the
open/close switch and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically
from any position and it stops 7.9 inches (20 cm)
before full closure. For full closure, push and hold
the open/close switch.
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
any other movement of the power roof switch will
stop the sunroof.
Manual Mode
To open the power roof manually, push and hold
the open/close switch to the full open position,
then release. To close the power roof manually,
push and hold the open/close switch to the fully
closed position, then release.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the power roof movement. The
power roof will remain in a partially opened
position until the switch is operated and held
again.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or
ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power roof while operating the power
roof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open power
roof. You could also be seriously injured or
killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly
and make sure all passengers are also prop-
erly secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
power top. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the power roof opening. Injury may result.
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLOSING THE POWER ROOF
Express Mode
Push the close switch and release it within one-half
second. The power roof will close fully and stop
automatically. This is called “Express Close”.
During Express Close operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the power roof.
Manual Mode
To close the power roof manually, push and hold
the close switch. The power roof will move forward
and automatically stop at the fully closed position.
Any release of the switch will stop the movement.
The power roof will remain in a partially closed
position until the switch is pushed and held again.
If the power roof switch fails, the sunroof can be
operated manually. See, Ú page 56 for further
information.
POWER ROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the window glass. For important information
on cleaning and caring for your vehicle
Ú page 286.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
The power sliding roof switch can remain active in
Accessory Delay for up to approximately
10 minutes after the vehicle’s ignition is placed to
the OFF position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off timing is programmable through the
Uconnect system Ú page 123.
RELEARN PROCEDURE
For vehicles equipped with a power sliding roof,
there is a relearn procedure that allows you to
calibrate the power roof when the “Express Mode”
stops working. To reset the power sliding roof,
follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position, and
start the vehicle.
NOTE:
The engine must be running to perform the relearn
procedure.
2. Ensure the power sliding roof is in the fully
closed position.
3. Push and hold the open/close switch for
10 seconds. This will put the power sliding roof
into calibration mode.
4. Continue holding down the close button while
the top goes fully open and then back to fully
close.
5. Once the power sliding roof has stopped in the
fully closed position, release the open/close
switch. The power sliding roof is now reset and
ready to use.
NOTE:
If the open/close switch is released anytime during
the relearning process, the relearn may not be
complete, and the procedure must be repeated.
HOOD
TO OPEN THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located underneath the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push
the safety latch release lever toward the
passenger side of the vehicle. The hood
release lever is located behind the center front
edge of the hood.
Safety Latch Release Lever Location
3. Remove the support rod from the locking tab
and insert it into the seat located on the
underside of the hood. Be sure the rod is
locked into position.
Hood Prop System
TO CLOSE THE HOOD
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the
other hand remove the support rod from its
seat and reinsert it into the locking tab.
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) from the engine compartment and
drop it. Make sure that the hood is completely
closed.
1 — Locking Tab
2 — Support Rod
3 — Support Rod Seat
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close.
Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches.
Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE
TO UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
To unlock the liftgate from the outside, push the
electronic liftgate release and pull the liftgate open
with one fluid motion.
Electronic Liftgate Release
When opening the door, the interior dome light will
illuminate. The interior dome light will turn off
automatically by closing the liftgate Ú page 38.
If the liftgate is left open, the interior dome light will
shut off after a few minutes to conserve battery
life.
Emergency Opening
Proceed as follows:
1. Lower the headrests and fold the seatbacks.
1 — Yellow Tab
2. Using the supplied screwdriver (located under
cargo floor in tool kit), remove the yellow tab
from the liftgate latching mechanism.
3. With the yellow tab removed, insert the
screwdriver into the now open release tab slot
to trigger the release of the liftgate.
2 — Release Tab Slot
LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
Grab the liftgate closing handle and lower the
liftgate.
Liftgate Closing Handle
NOTE:
Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
possession of the key fob because the liftgate will
be locked automatically.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Removable Rear Shelf — If Equipped
To remove rear shelf, proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect the two links that support the
shelf at the eyelets.
Rear Shelf Support Links
2. Lift the rear part of the overhead luggage shelf.
3. Clear the pins placed outside of the shelf, and
then remove the rear shelf pulling it upwards.
4. The rear shelf can be stored in the cargo area,
or behind the front seatbacks.
Cargo Load Floor — If Equipped
The vehicle is equipped with a load floor that can
be adjusted as needed.
Position 1 (Lowered Position):
This position allows you to make the load floor flat
for ease of loading/unloading objects from the
cargo area. This position also makes it possible to
use the space below as another compartment for
storing fragile or smaller objects.
Position 2 (Elevated Position):
When the rear seatbacks and front passenger seat
are folded flat, it creates space for objects of long
dimensions. This position is recommended only
when transporting objects, then move the load
floor back to position 1.
NOTE:
With a full size spare, the floor will be at the
elevated position.
Access To The Loading Floor
To access the double load compartment, proceed
as follows:
1. Lift up on the load floor handle.
Load Floor Handle
2. Place the desired objects inside the compartment.
3. Reposition the load floor.
Cargo Area Storage
1 — Eyelets
2 — Links
CAUTION!
The load floor must be arranged in a central
position with respect to cargo area.
2
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Displacement Load Floor
To position the load from the lower to the upper
position, proceed as follows:
1. Grab the load floor handle and lift up the load
floor.
2. Correctly place the load floor on the side panel
guides and on the rear cross member.
Access To Tire Service Kit Or Spare Tire
To access the Tire Service Kit or spare tire and
container carrier, proceed as follows:
1. Grab the load floor handle and remove the
floor.
2. Pull the tab and lift up on the carpet.
Anchoring Of The Load
The cargo tie-downs, located on the trim panels
around the cargo area floor, should be used to
safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving.
Tie-Downs
Cargo Box — If Equipped
The cargo area contains a preformed cargo box
that can be used for the storage of objects that
allows you to obtain a uniform level when loading.
Cargo Box
NOTE:
The cargo box is sized for a maximum capacity of
distributed weight equal to 242 lb (110 kg).
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
63
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
NOTE:
The illumination of the graphics on the instrument cluster may vary according to the version (Monocolor or Color display).
3
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
Indicates the speed of the car.
2. Fuel Level Gauge
The fuel gauge in the instrument panel indi-
cates the amount of fuel left in the tank.
The light comes on, together with a chime
and the display of a message in the instru-
ment cluster display, when the gas tank has
1.5 to 2 gallons (5 to 7 liters) of fuel
remaining.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
The vehicle can be equipped with multi
functional instrument cluster display which
offers useful information to the driver.
With the ignition in the OFF position (and
the key removed, for vehicles with a
mechanical key), opening/closing of a door
will activate the instrument cluster display
for viewing, and display the total miles or
kilometers in the odometer.
4. Engine Coolant Temperature
The temperature gauge on the instrument
panel displays the temperature of the
engine coolant and starts providing indica-
tions when the coolant temperature
exceeds approximately 122°F (50°C). In
the normal use of the car, the temperature
gauge can move in different directions
based on the use of the car. The light comes
on, together with a chime and the display of
a message in the instrument cluster display,
to indicate an excessive increase in the
temperature of the engine coolant. Stop the
engine and contact an authorized dealer.
5. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in Revolutions
Per Minute (RPM x 1000).
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
The vehicle is equipped with multi functional
instrument cluster display which offers useful
information to the driver. With the ignition in the
OFF position (and the key removed, for vehicles
with a mechanical key), opening/closing of a door
will activate the instrument cluster display for
viewing, and display the total miles or kilometers in
the odometer. The instrument cluster display is
designed to display important information about
the vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver
interactive display located on the instrument
panel, your instrument cluster display can show
you how systems are working and give you
warnings when they aren’t. The steering wheel
mounted controls allow you to scroll through and
enter the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and
make selections and adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
C
ONTROL BUTTONS
The system allows the driver to select information
by pushing the following buttons mounted on the
steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 65
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster. Pushing the controls on the left side of the
steering wheel allows the driver to select vehicle
information and Personal Settings.
Push the
back/left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of
a main menu item.
Push the
up arrow button to scroll upward
through the main menus and submenus
(Speedometer, Trip, Drive Mode Selector,
Vehicle Info, Driver Assist, Audio, Phone, Naviga-
tion, Messages, Settings).
Push the
right arrow button to access the
information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
Push the
down arrow button to scroll down-
ward through the main menu and submenus
(Speedometer, Trip, Drive Mode Selector,
Vehicle Info, Driver Assist, Audio, Phone, Naviga-
tion, Messages, Settings).
Push the
OK button to access/select the infor-
mation screens or submenu screens of a main
menu item. Push and hold the
OK button for two
seconds to reset displayed/selected features
that can be reset.
ENGINE OIL CHANGE RESET —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil”
message will display in the instrument cluster
display. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/
RUN position. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled
maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do
not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three
times, within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MAIN
M
ENU
The Main Menu is composed of several options
that can be selected using the control buttons
above.
NOTE:
The display mode of the menu items varies
depending on the type of display.
For some items, a submenu is provided.
In the Uconnect system, some items on the
menu are not shown on the instrument cluster
display Ú page 64.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu/
Submenu Items
The Menu is composed of the following items:
Speedometer
Trip
Instantaneous Info
Trip A
Trip B
Drive Mode Selector — If Equipped
Auto Mode
Sport Mode
All Weather Mode
3
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Info
Tire Pressure
Oil Temperature
Battery Voltage
Driver Assist
Lane Departure Warning
Adaptive Cruise Control
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Audio
Phone
Navigation
Messages
Settings
Display
Units
Clock and Date
Security
Safety & Assistance
Lights
Doors & Locks
Engine OFF Procedure — If Equipped
Speedometer
View and change the speedometer scale from mph
to km/h (km/h to mph).
Trip
This instrument cluster display menu item allows
you to view and select information about the "Trip
Computer”:
Instantaneous info
View the distance to empty (miles or km).
View the instantaneous consumption (mpg,
or l/100km or km/l).
Trip A
View Trip A distance (miles or km).
View travel time A (hours/minutes/
seconds).
View average consumption A (mpg, or
l/100km or km/l).
View average speed A (mph or km/h).
Trip B
View Trip B distance (miles or km).
View travel time B (hours/minutes/
seconds).
View average consumption B (mpg, or
l/100km or km/l).
View average speed B (mph or km/h).
Drive Mode Selector
This instrument cluster display menu/submenu
items allows you to view and select information
about the "Drive Mode".
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until "Vehicle Info" is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
right arrow button and Coolant Temp will be
displayed. Push the
right or left arrow button
to scroll through the following information displays:
Tire pressure
View the information relating to the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (if
equipped).
Oil Temperature
View the engine oil temperature.
Battery Voltage
View the voltage value (state of charge) of
the battery.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 67
Driver Assist
This menu item allows you to change the settings
(Notice LaneSense and Intensity LaneSense)
relating to the LaneSense system (if equipped):
Notice LaneSense
By selecting this function, you can select the
“readiness” of LaneSense, choosing between
the options "Near," "Medium," or "Far."
Intensity LaneSense
Using this function, you can select the force
applied to the steering wheel to keep the car in
the roadway through the electrical drive system
due to LaneSense.
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Automatically stops the engine during a vehicle
stop under the right conditions to reduce fuel
consumption.
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed
in the instrument cluster. This menu shows
messages related to Stop/Start. Only one message
can be viewed at a time until the condition is
cleared.
When the Stop/Start is engaged (and the engine is
off), the associated hardware indicator light is
turned on. When the Stop/Start button on the
central stack is pushed, a Stop/Start status
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
Audio
This menu item allows you to view the instrument
cluster display and the information present on the
display of the Uconnect system.
The information displayed is:
“Radio (AM or FM)”: view Radio Station Name (if
equipped), frequency, and graphical icon.
MP3: title display or song number playing.
USB: title display or song number playing.
Ipod: display the song title and graphic element.
Bluetooth®: displays the song title and a
graphic element.
SAT: displays the station name and a graphic
element.
APP: displays strings and a graphic element.
Phone
This menu displays the current status of a phone
connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth®.
If no phone is connected, the menu will not
function when the
OK button is pushed. Otherwise,
if a phone is connected, push the
OK button to
enter the menu. The following items will display:
Recent calls: displays a list of the last 10 calls.
SMS reader: displays the last 10 text messages
and if they are read or unread.
Favorite numbers: displays a maximum of six
favorite numbers.
Navigation
If activated, this menu item will display navigation
status and directions.
Messages (Stored)
This menu item allows you to display the
information messages/malfunction stored.
The background color of the display varies
according to the priorities of the failure:
Failed Messages with low priority display in
yellow.
Failed Messages with high priority display in red.
Settings
This menu item allows you to change the settings
for the following:
Display
Units
Clock and Date
Security
Safety and Assistance
3
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lights
Doors and Locks
Engine OFF Procedure — If Equipped
Display
By selecting "Display," you can access the following
settings:
Screen Setup: Allows you to configure the
display screen.
Language: Allows you to select the language in
which to display the information/warnings.
Automatic Reset Trip B: Allows you to set the
options to reset the Trip B (never, always, every
two hours or every eight hours).
Phone Repetition: Allows you to select “On” or
“Off”. The instrument cluster display can also
display the information concerning phone
mode. The information that can be displayed is
the connection status of the mobile phone
(phone connected or disconnected), the active
telephone calls/incoming/on hold, and the
management of double calls (first incoming
second waiting, etc.).
Navigation Repetition: Allows you to select “On”
or “Off” on the instrument cluster display, infor-
mation relating to the navigation mode.
Units
By selecting the item "Units Of Measure,” you can
select the unit of measure used in the display.
Possible options are:
US
Metric
Custom
Clock And Date
By selecting the item "clock and date," you can
adjust the clock.
Possible options are:
Set Time: Adjust hours/minutes.
Set Format: Adjust the time format "12h"
(12 hours) or "24h" (24 hours).
Set Date: Adjust day/month/year.
Security
By selecting the item “Security,” you can make the
following adjustments:
Speed Warning: Set the vehicle speed limit
(mph or km/h), which the driver is notified
through a visual and acoustic signaling (display
of a message and a symbol on the display).
Seat Belt Buzzer: This function is only viewable
when the Seat Belt Reminder (SBR) system is
active.
Hill Start Assist: Activation/Deactivation of the
Hill Start Assist system.
Safety And Assistance
By selecting the item "Safety & Assistance," you
can make the following adjustments:
Full Brake Control: A selection of operating
modes of the Full Brake Control system.
Full Brake Control Sensitivity: A selection of the
"readiness" of intervention of the Full Brake
Control system, based on the distance to the
obstacle.
Park Assist: A selection of the type of informa-
tion provided by Park Assist.
Park Assist Vol.: A selection of the volume of
acoustic signals provided by Park Assist.
Rain Sensing Wipers: Enabling/disabling the
automatic operation of wipers in the event of
rain.
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped: A selection
of the "readiness" of intervention of LaneSense.
Warning Buzzer Volume: Increase or decrease
the volume of the buzzer by selecting “Low”,
“Medium”, or “High”.
Maintenance Brakes — If Equipped: Activation
of the procedure to carry out braking system
maintenance.
Auto Park Brake — If Equipped: Enable/disable
auto-insertion of the Electric Parking Brake.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 69
Lights
By selecting the item "Lights," you can make the
following adjustments:
Headlight Off Delay: Set the delay for headlight
shutoff after engine shutoff.
Headlight Sensitivity: Adjust the sensitivity of
headlight brightness.
Interior Ambient Lights: Increase or decrease
the brightness of the Interior Ambient Lights.
Greeting Lights: Enable/disable the vehicle’s
Greeting Lights.
Auto High Beam: Activate/deactivate the auto-
matic main beam headlights — If Equipped.
Daytime Lights: Activate/deactivate the daytime
running lights.
Cornering Lights: Activate/deactivate the
cornering lights — If Equipped.
Doors And Locks
By selecting the item "Doors & Locks," you can
make the following adjustments:
Auto Door Lock: Activate/deactivate the auto-
matic locking of the doors with the vehicle
moving.
Auto Unlock On Exit: Automatic unlocking of the
doors when exiting the vehicle.
Flash Light With Lock: Activate the direction indi-
cators when closing the doors.
Sound Horn With Lock: Activate/deactivate the
horn when pushing the lock button on the
Remote Keyless Entry. The options are "Off,"
"First Press,” and "Second Press."
Horn With Remote Start: Activate/deactivate
the horn at the Remote Starting of the engine
with the Remote Keyless Entry.
Remote Door Unlock Without Passive Entry:
Allows you to choose whether to unlock all the
doors or only the driver’s side door on the first
push of the unlock button on the Remote
Keyless Entry.
Door Unlock With Passive Entry: Allows you to
open the driver door only on the first push of the
unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry or
using the passive entry handles on the doors or
liftgates.
Passive Entry — If Equipped: Activate the auto-
matic locking of the doors.
Engine OFF Procedure — If Equipped: Allows you
to turn off the engine from the instrument
cluster in the event of an ignition switch failure.
Instructions for turning off the engine via the
instrument cluster display controls will display in
the instrument cluster.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
These indications are indicative and precautionary
and as such must not be considered as exhaustive
and/or alternative to the information contained in
the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active telltales will display first if
applicable. The system check menu may appear
different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional
and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and will
turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If
the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system inspected
at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
3
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake
light turns on it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock
Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates
a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or
that a problem with the Brake Booster has been
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
in the master cylinder has dropped below a
specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli-
cation.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may
be a malfunction with the charging
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine
condition. If the light turns on while driving,
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the
Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn it
off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off immediately
and call for service.
NOTE:
As the coolant temperature gauge approaches "H",
this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will
sound.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 71
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when one or
more door(s) are not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, there
will also be a single chime.
Drowsiness Detected Warning —
If Equipped
Driver drowsiness detection helps to
avoid crashes caused by fatigue by
advising drivers to take a break in time.
Once Drowsy Driver is detected, A pop-up
will display continuously until the driver presses
the
OK button to clear.
Once the pop-up message is cleared, it is stored
until the condition is no longer true.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the EPS system
Ú page 90.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC system.
If a problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or
flash depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed
in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If
the light remains on with the vehicle running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position
and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light
does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Hood Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is left open and not fully closed.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position and if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound
and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled,
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound Ú page 188.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
3
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a
message in the instrument cluster
display and a buzzer) to indicate a
transmission fault. Contact an authorized
dealer if the message remains after restarting the
engine.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security system is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is
disarmed.
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the
trunk is open and not fully closed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the ACC system.
Contact a local authorized dealer for
service Ú page 94.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required as
soon as possible. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the brake
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Audio System Failure Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate to report a failure
of the Audio System. Contact an
authorized dealership as soon as
possible.
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should
go out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it
was turned off previously.
Drive Mode System Overheating
This symbol appears, together with a
dedicated message on the display, in
case of overheating of the Drive Mode
Selector system. In these conditions, the
Drive Mode Selector system can still be used to
select the required driving mode, but the mode will
be engaged only when the system cools down.
The symbol will stay on for as long as the
overheating condition persists.
Drowsiness Detected System Fault
Warning — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Drowsiness Detected System is not
operating correctly and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
External Light Failure Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The External Light Failure Indicator will
come on when a failure to one of the
following lights is detected:
Direction Indicators
Backup Lights
Parking Lights
Daytime Running Lights
License Plate Lights
The failure relating to these lights could be:
One or more blown bulbs
A blown protection fuse
A break in the electrical connection
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the
filler cap to disengage the light. If the
light does not turn off, please see an
authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 1.3–1.8 gal (5–7 L) this
light will turn on, and remain on until fuel
is added.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be
solid yellow when the vehicle is
approaching a lane marker. The warning
light will flash when the vehicle is
crossing the lane marker Ú page 108.
Service LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and
requires service. Please see an
authorized dealer.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
3
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
the light stays on through several typical driving
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced
by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this
occurs.
Service Warning Light — If Equipped
The “Maintenance Plan” includes vehicle
maintenance at fixed intervals. For
further information Ú page 235. This
message is displayed automatically
along with the warning light when the key is turned
to RUN - 1,242 miles (2,000 km) or 30 days before
these deadlines, and reappears every time the key
is turned to RUN. The indication will appear in
miles or kilometers according to the "Unit Of
Measurement" settings. When the next scheduled
service is approaching and the key is turned to
RUN, the word “Service” will appear on the display,
followed by the number of miles or kilometers left.
Contact an authorized dealership. The operations
in the “Maintenance Plan” will be performed and
the message will be reset.
Service Stop / Start System Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact
an authorized dealer for service.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that the
tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as refer-
enced above, can reach higher temperatures
than in normal operating conditions. This can
cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flam-
mable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or seri-
ous injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehi-
cle control system. It also could affect fuel econ-
omy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop
and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even
if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission
fluid temperature is running hot. This
may occur with severe usage, such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely
pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the
transmission into PARK and run the engine at idle
or slightly higher until the light turns off.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels
can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable.
After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom-
mended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage
or transmission failure.
3
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when there is a
malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs.
Full Brake Control System Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you.
Full Brake Control System Off Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that the Full Brake Control System is off.
Fuel Cutoff Failure Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate if there is a fuel
cutoff failure. If this light illuminates, take
it to an authorized dealer and have them
inspect it.
Fuel Cutoff Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will illuminate after an
accident has occurred, and the system
has shut the fuel off.
Fuel Level Sensor Failure
This light illuminates when there is a fuel
level sensor failure. If this light
illuminates, take it to an authorized
dealer and have them inspect it.
Icy Road Condition Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate during an icy road
condition.
Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm
Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the
vehicle security system system has
detected an attempt to break into the
vehicle.
NOTE:
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position,
the Vehicle Security Warning Light could illuminate
if a problem with the system is detected. This
condition will result in the engine being shut off
after two seconds.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise
control is set to the desired speed
Ú page 93.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front fog lights are on.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates
solid green when both lane markings
have been detected and the system is
“armed” and ready to provide visual and
torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure
occurs Ú page 108.
Parking / Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the parking lights or headlights are
turned on.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop”
mode.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is
active.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but
not armed, the LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid white. This occurs when
only left, right, or neither lane line has
been detected. If a single lane line is detected, the
system is ready to provide only visual warnings if
an unintentional lane departure occurs on the
detected lane line Ú page 108.
Light Sensor Failure
This light illuminates when there is light
sensor failure. If this light illuminates,
have an authorized dealer inspect it.
Speed Warning Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The indicator light will illuminate white
along with a notification text message
(Speed Warning Set to XX followed by
unit). When the set speed is exceeded, a
single chime will sound along with pop-up message
of “Speed Warning Exceeded.” Speed Warning can
be turned on and off in the instrument cluster
display.
The number “55” is only an example of a speed
that can be set.
Idle Coasting Indicator Light
The Idle Coasting feature works by
allowing engine speeds to drop to idle,
saving fuel. This feature is a menu
option. The indicator is only seen when
Idle Coasting is chosen and active.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam headlights
are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to
pass" scenario.
GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Ready/Canceled Indicator
Light
This light will turn on when the cruise
control has been turned on, but not set,
or canceled by the driver Ú page 93.
3
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine
emissions well within current government
regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in
making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need
to access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 122.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is
functioning and is not on when the
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may
not be ready if your vehicle was
recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery
or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system
should be determined not ready for the I/M test,
your vehicle may fail the test.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
before any emissions tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station.
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready,
you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until
you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine.
This means that your vehicle's OBD II
system is
not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition
in the off position or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
in order for your OBD II system to update. A
recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station.
The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the
MIL is on with the engine running.
3
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your
seat belt, and if present, instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the
NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake before
shifting to any driving range.
Normal Starting
Proceed as follows:
1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put the
gear selector in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position.
2. Press on the brake pedal, without pressing the
accelerator.
3. Press the START/STOP ignition button and
release it as soon as the engine is started.
4. If the engine does not start, place the ignition
in the OFF position and wait 10-15 seconds
before attempting to restart the engine.
TIP START FEATURE
Do not press the accelerator. Briefly press the
START/STOP ignition button and release it. The
starter motor will continue to run but will
automatically disengage when the engine is
running.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
To ensure reliable starting under extreme cold
conditions an externally powered electric block
heater (if equipped) is required below -20°F
(-29°C).
To prevent possible engine damage while starting
at low temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine
cranking when the ambient temperature is less
than -20°F (-29°C), and the oil temperature
sensor reading indicates an engine block heater
has not been used. The message “Plug in Engine
Heater” will be displayed in the instrument cluster
when the ambient temperature is below -4°F
(-20°C) at the time the engine is shut off as a
reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next
cold start.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to
the battery to ensure a full battery charge
during the crank cycle.
2. Press the START/STOP ignition button and
release it when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds,
place the ignition in the OFF position, wait
10 to 15 seconds to allow the starter to cool,
then repeat the Extended Park Starting
procedure.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN posi-
tion. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
STARTING AND OPERATING 81
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts,
allow the starter to cool for at least
10 minutes, then repeat the procedure.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed
the “Normal Starting” or “Cold Weather Operation”
procedure, and has not experienced an extended
park condition as identified in “Extended Park
Starting” procedure it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold
it there. Crank the engine for no more than
10 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in
case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition in the
RUN position, release the accelerator pedal and
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
AFTER STARTING — WARMING UP THE
E
NGINE
Proceed as follows:
Travel slowly, letting the engine run at a reduced
RPM, without accelerating suddenly.
It is recommended to wait until the engine
coolant temperature gauge starts to rise for
maximum performance.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold the
ignition or push the ENGINE START/STOP button
three times consecutively within a few seconds.
The engine will shut down, and the ignition will be
placed in the RUN position.
Turning off the car (place the ignition from the RUN
position to the OFF position), the power supply to
the accessories are maintained for a period of
three minutes.
NOTE:
If the vehicle fails to shut off using the ignition
Ú page 64.
Opening the driver side door with the ignition in
RUN will sound a short chime that reminds the
driver to place the ignition to OFF.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a
time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto-
matic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started,
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 226.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds
before trying again.
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
window switches remains active for three minutes.
Opening a front door will cancel this function.
After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the
temperature inside the engine compartment to
cool before shutting off the engine.
TURBOCHARGER “COOL DOWN” —
I
F EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to
cool the turbocharger after the engine is shut off.
Depending on the type of driving and the amount
of cargo, the pump will run for up to 10 minutes
after the engine has been shut off to circulate
coolant through the turbocharger. Although the
pump is rubber-mounted for quiet operation, it is
normal to hear it running during this time.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades Ú page 293.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first
few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as a problem.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers
simple operation, and some additional features
that make the parking brake more convenient and
useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent
the vehicle from rolling while parked. Before
leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
The EPB switch is located in the center console.
You can engage the EPB in two ways;
Manually, by pulling up on the EPB switch
momentarily to apply.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake
feature in the Customer Programmable
Features section of the Uconnect Settings.
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the EPB manually, pull up on the switch
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back
of the vehicle while the EPB engages. Once the
parking brake is fully engaged, the Brake Warning
Light in the instrument cluster and an indicator on
the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the
brake pedal while you apply the EPB, you may
notice a small amount of brake pedal movement.
The EPB can be applied even when the ignition is
in the OFF position however, it can only be released
when the ignition is in the RUN position.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
STARTING AND OPERATING 83
(Continued)
NOTE:
The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB switch
is held for longer than 60 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extin-
guish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the EPB
will automatically engage whenever the
transmission is moved into PARK when the ignition
switch is in the STOP/OFF position. If your foot is on
the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement while the EPB is engaging.
The EPB will be automatically released if the
driver’s seat belt is buckled (in case of automatic
transmission) and driver's intention to start (in
forward or reverse direction) is recognized by the
system
To release the EPB manually, the ignition must be
in the RUN position. Put your foot on the brake
pedal, then push the EPB switch down
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back
of the car while the parking brake disengages. You
may also notice a small amount of movement in
the brake pedal. Once the EPB is fully disengaged,
the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster
and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the EPB before placing the gear selector in PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK. The EPB should always be
applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
If exceptional circumstances should make it
necessary to engage the EPB while the vehicle is in
motion, maintain upward pressure on the EPB
switch for as long as engagement is desired. The
brake warning lamp could illuminate in case of the
hydraulic system is not available. The rear stop
lamps will also be illuminated automatically while
the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the EPB while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought
to a complete stop using the EPB, when the vehicle
reaches approximately 1.9 mph (3 km/h) the EPB
will remain engaged.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN posi-
tion. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may
allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. This
may be accompanied by the Brake Warning Light
flashing. In this status, some EPB functionalities
may be deactivated. In this event, urgent service of
the EPB system is required. Do not rely on the EPB
to hold the vehicle stationary.
AUTO PARK BRAKE
The EPB can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle speed is below
1.9 mph (3 km/h) and the automatic transmission
is placed in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF position. Auto Park Brake is enabled and
disabled by customer selection through the
Customer Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect Settings.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be
bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the release
position while the transmission is placed in PARK
and the ignition is in the RUN position. In some
cases, if the ignition is cycled from ON/RUN to OFF
and the gear selector is not firmly locked in the
PARK position, EPB applies automatically even if
Auto Park Brake has been previously disabled.
SAFEHOLD
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that
will engage the parking brake automatically if the
vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition switch is
in the RUN position.
The EPB will automatically engage if all of the
following conditions are met:
Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
There is no attempt to press the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
The seat belt is unbuckled.
The driver door is open.
The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing
the EPB switch while the driver door is open and
the brake pedal is pressed. Once manually
bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again once the
vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition
is cycled to the OFF position and back to RUN
position.
BRAKE SERVICE MODE
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs
for which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. You should only enter Brake Service
Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
necessary for you or your technician to push the
rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the EPB
system, this can only be done after retracting the
EPB actuator. The actuator retraction can be done
easily by entering the Brake Service Mode. This
menu based system will guide you through the
steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in
order to perform rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be met
in order to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The parking brake must be disabled.
The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
The EPB switch not activated.
The ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The brake pedal not pressed.
While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp will flash
continuously while the ignition is placed in the ON
position.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake
to slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to
the brake system. Be sure the parking brake is
fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so
can lead to brake failure and a collision.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
STARTING AND OPERATING 85
(Continued)
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instrument
cluster if Brake Service Mode cannot be activated.
When brake service work is complete, the following
steps must be followed to reset the parking brake
system to normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB switch.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instrument
cluster if Brake Service Mode cannot be deacti-
vated.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed
both beside the gear selector and in the
instrument cluster. To select a gear range, push
the lock button on the gear selector and move the
lever rearward or forward. You must also press the
brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK
(or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds). Select the DRIVE range for
normal driving.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for
which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN posi-
tion. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
GEAR SELECTOR
The transmission gear selector has PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-)
shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using
the AutoStick shift control. Toggling the gear
selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the
AutoStick position (beside the DRIVE position) will
manually select the transmission gear, and will
display the current gear in the instrument cluster
as 1, 2, 3, etc.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed
forward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-)
position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick
mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is
displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear
selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
with environmental and road conditions. The
transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
The 9-speed transmission has been developed to
meet the needs of current and future FWD/AWD
vehicles. Software and calibration is refined to
optimize the customer’s driving experience and
fuel economy. By design, some vehicle and
driveline combinations utilize 9th gear only in very
specific driving situations and conditions.
Gear Selector Lock Button
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
GEAR RANGES
PARK (P)
The engine can be started in this range. Never
attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
When parking on a hill, apply the EPB before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the gear selector out of
PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob.
CAUTION!
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
STARTING AND OPERATING 87
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to ensure
that you have properly engaged the transmission
into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock button
on the gear selector, and firmly move the gear
selector all the way forward until it stops and is
fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P),
and is not blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
Electric Park Brake and shift the transmission into
PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN posi-
tion. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the
ON/RUN position, and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all
forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds or while towing a heavy trailer), use the
AutoStick shift control to select a lower gear. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal
operating limits, the transmission controller may
modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce
engine torque, and/or expand the range of torque
converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light may
illuminate and the transmission may operate
differently until the transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation
may be modified depending on engine and
transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. This feature improves warm up time of the
engine and transmission to achieve maximum
efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter
clutch, and shifts into EIGHTH or NINTH gear, are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm.
Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving you
more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to
maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable
upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall
vehicle performance. This system can also provide
you with more control during passing, city driving,
cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position
(beside the DRIVE position), it can be moved
forward and rearward. This allows the driver to
manually select the transmission gear being used.
Moving the gear selector forward (-) triggers a
downshift, and rearward (+) an upshift. The current
gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only shift
up or down when the driver moves the gear
selector rearward (+) or forward (-), except as
described below.
The transmission will automatically upshift
lower and higher when necessary to prevent
engine overspeed.
The transmission will automatically downshift
as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging)
and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to
FIRST or SECOND gear (depending on model)
when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as
the vehicle is accelerated.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 119.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 232.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
STARTING AND OPERATING 89
You can start out (from a stop) in FIRST or
SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND gear can
be helpful in snow or icy conditions. Tap the gear
selector forward or rearward to select the
desired gear after the vehicle is brought to a
stop.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to overspeed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too
low of a vehicle speed.
Avoid using Cruise Control when AutoStick is
engaged because the transmission will not shift
automatically.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode
if a fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear
selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or
out of the AutoStick position at any time without
taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
TRANSMISSION LIMP HOME MODE
Transmission function is electronically monitored
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
that could result in transmission damage,
Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this
mode, the transmission may operate only in a fixed
gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL. The Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp
Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to
an authorized dealer for service without damaging
the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission. If the transmission
cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is
required.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock, which requires the transmission to be in
PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF
position. Also, the transmission is locked in PARK
whenever the ignition is in the OFF position.
BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the ignition must be in the RUN position
(engine running or not) and the brake pedal must
be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed before
pushing the button on the gear selector to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 STARTING AND OPERATING
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive
(AWD). The system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required. Under
normal driving conditions, the front wheels provide
most of the traction. If the front wheels begin to
lose traction, power is shifted automatically to the
rear wheels. The greater the front wheel traction
loss, the greater the power transfer to the rear
wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque
will be sent to the rear in a preemptive effort to
improve vehicle launch and performance
characteristics.
DYNAMIC SELECTOR — IF EQUIPPED
The Dynamic Selector combines the capabilities of
the vehicle control systems, along with driver input,
to provide the best performance in all driving
conditions.
Dynamic Selector Switch
The Dynamic Selector consists of the following
positions:
Auto Mode – This mode is designed for comfort
and safety in normal driving conditions. In versions
equipped with All-Wheel Drive, this mode also
reduces fuel consumption by automatically
altering the distribution of torque between the
front and rear axle.
All Weather Mode – This mode offers increased
traction control and stability control for low traction
conditions such as driving on a dirt road or off-road
as well as wet and slippery roads.
Sport Mode – This mode is designed to increase
steering feedback to the driver with a slight
increase in effort and changes the transmission
shift schedules for more aggressive shifting. This
driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads
where more steering precision is desired in spirited
cornering.
WARNING MESSAGES
In the event of a system fault, the system
automatically defaults to “Auto” mode and a
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
For further information Ú page 64.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The power steering system
adapts to different driving conditions.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” OR “POWER
STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE SYSTEM”
message and a steering wheel icon are displayed
on the instrument cluster screen, it indicates that
the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power
steering assistance Ú page 64.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type
tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used.
Unequal tire size may cause failure of the power
transfer unit.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
STARTING AND OPERATING 91
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer the
vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a
substantial increase in steering effort, espe-
cially at low speeds and during parking maneu-
vers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
STOP/START SYSTEM
The Stop/Start function was developed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or
pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically
restart the engine.
AUTOMATIC MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY and if all
other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/
START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section Ú page 64.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and
the brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if they
are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
operation of the Stop/Start system may be viewed
in the instrument cluster display Stop/Start
Screen. In the following situations the engine will
not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
HVAC set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Vehicle is in 4WD Low transfer case mode (if
equipped with 4WD).
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pres-
sure with vehicle in DRIVE position.
Accelerator pedal input.
Engine temp is too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from
previous AUTOSTOP.
Steering angle is beyond threshold.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system going
into a STOP/START READY state under more
extreme conditions of the items listed above.
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 STARTING AND OPERATING
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when
the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically
re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission gear selector is moved out of
DRIVE except in the PARK and NEUTRAL posi-
tion.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake
pedal applications).
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
4WD system is put into 4WD Low mode (if
equipped with 4WD).
Conditions That Force An Application Of The
Electric Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
The driver’s door is open and brake pedal
released.
The driver’s door is open and the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled.
The engine hood has been opened.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
Steering wheel is beyond threshold.
If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the engine
off, the engine may require a manual restart and
the Electric Park Brake may require a manual
release (press brake pedal and push Electric Park
Brake switch) Ú page 64.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and the Autostop mode
will be disabled Ú page 64.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an
ON condition every time the ignition is turned off
and back on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system,
the system will not shut down the engine. A
"SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM" message and a
yellow Stop/Start telltale will appear in the
instrument cluster display Ú page 64.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
appears in the instrument cluster display, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
STARTING AND OPERATING 93
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system:
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a
constant preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the
vehicle speed up to the preset speed to main-
tain a distance with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not
enabled, Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control
is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be
unavailable, and vice versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument
cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the on/off button a second time. The
cruise indicator light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
A cruise indicator light, along with set speed will
also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster
when the speed is set.
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — On/Off
5 — RES/Resume
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always ensure the system is off when
you are not using it.
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease
speed by pushing the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button is
released, then the new set speed will be estab-
lished.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button is
released, then the new set speed will be estab-
lished.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the
accelerator to pass as you would normally. When
the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the
set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or
gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive
without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Deactivation
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
ESC intervention, brake control mitigation,
Electronic Park Brake intervention, or normal
brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Cruise Control without erasing the
set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in
the OFF position erases the set speed from
memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while
traveling on highways and major roadways.
However, it is not a safety system and not designed
to prevent collisions. Cruise Control function
performs differently if your vehicle is not equipped
with ACC
Ú page 93.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged
in light to moderate traffic conditions without the
constant need to reset your speed. ACC utilizes a
radar sensor and a forward facing camera
designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you
to maintain a set speed.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
STARTING AND OPERATING 95
(Continued)
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC
will apply limited braking or accelerate (not to
exceed the original set speed) automatically to
maintain a preset following distance, while
matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Colli-
sion Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled)
will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you.
Always be aware of the feature selected
Ú page 297.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The Cruise Control buttons (located on the right
side of the steering wheel) operate the ACC
system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsi-
bility to be attentive of road, traffic, and
weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to
the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly,
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a
disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance condi-
tions.
Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
You should turn the ACC system off:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep
uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving
at a constant speed.
WARNING!
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — Distance Setting Decrease
5 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
6 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
7 — RES/Resume
8 — Distance Setting Increase
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display shows the current
ACC system settings. The information it displays
depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button until one of the following shows in the
instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed,
the display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC
display activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster display will read “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following condi-
tions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or
NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), or other stability
control systems are operating or have just oper-
ated
During automatic braking by the Full Brake
Control system (if equipped)
When Cruise Control is activated
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again.
At this time, the system will turn off and the
instrument cluster display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it to
go faster than you want. You could lose control
and have a collision. Always ensure the system
is off when you are not using it.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
STARTING AND OPERATING 97
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push
the SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and
release. The instrument cluster display will show
the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without
ACC enabled. To change between the different
modes, push the ACC on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise Control off.
Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) Fixed
Speed Cruise Control mode.
ACC or Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set when the
vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set
speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle.
Neither system can be set below 20 mph
(32 km/h).
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate
beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
message “Adaptive Cruise Control Override” will
display in the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while ACC is enabled, the system will not
be controlling the distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will
only be determined by the position of the accel-
erator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANC button is pushed.
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
is pushed.
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
To Resume Speed
If there is a set speed in the memory, push the RES
button and then remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display
will show the last set speed.
ACC or Fixed Speed Cruise Control can only be
resumed at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h).
NOTE:
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system
will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
proximity warning does not activate and no
alarm will sound even if you are too close to the
vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the
vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a
set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too
sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease
speed by pushing the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The new set
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h incre-
ments until the button is released. The new set
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET
(+) button or
SET
(-) button, the new set speed will be the current
speed of the vehicle.
When ACC Is Active:
When you use the SET
(-) button to decelerate, if
the engine’s braking power does not slow the
vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the
brake system will automatically slow the
vehicle.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while climbing
uphill or descending downhill. This is normal
operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
If Sport mode is chosen on the Dynamic
Selector, the ACC system will switch to Sport
mode. The system will become more reactive in
case of acceleration.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set
by varying the distance setting between four bars
(longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and
one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the
distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance
setting will show in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Increase button and release. Each time
the button is pushed, the distance setting
increases by one bar (longer).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle
is detected in the same lane, the instrument
cluster display will show the ACC Set With Target
Detected Light. The system adjusts vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting,
regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above
the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages Ú page 96.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will appear in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the Full Brake
Control system is applying the brakes autono-
mously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is
triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on the
left hand side.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“FRONT RADAR SENSOR TEMPORARILY
BLOCKED” WARNING
The “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may
also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and
snow, or tunnels with reflective tiles). The ACC
system will recover after the vehicle has left these
areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If the “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is still available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning
or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located
in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Do not use
solvents or abrasive substances.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunc-
tion or failure and require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see an authorized
dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or after-
market grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC
system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is
no longer present, the system will return to the
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume
function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor
and inhibit ACC/Full Brake Control System oper-
ation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front
Windshield” warning will display when conditions
temporarily limit system performance. This most
often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may
also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on
windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded
performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in adverse weather conditions. The
ACC/Full Brake Control system will recover after
the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any
vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rear view
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an
obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system will
return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front
Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and
forward facing camera inspected at an authorized
dealer.
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
display reads “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality
Frontal Camera Service Required” or “Cruise
Control Service Required”, there may be an
internal system fault or a temporary malfunction
that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try
activating ACC again later, following an ignition
cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert
and may need to intervene. The following are
examples of these types of situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using
ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle
merging in from a side lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset
vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel,
which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may increase or decrease the vehicle
speed for stability, with no vehicle ahead detected.
Once the vehicle is out of the curve, the system will
resume your original set speed. This is a part of
normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on
hills. ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane
depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hill.
NOTE:
The driver must maintain control of the vehicle,
remain alert, and be ready to apply the brakes if
needed.
ACC Hill Example
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely
in the lane in which you are traveling. In the lane
changing example below, ACC has not yet detected
the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect
the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to
take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if
necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in
situations where the vehicle you are following exits
your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your
lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect
movement from it. Always be attentive and ready
to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The Park Assist system provides visual and audible
indications of the distance between the rear and/
or front fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle
when backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a
parking maneuver).
For limitations of this system and
recommendations, see Ú page 106.
Park Assist will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
Park Assist is active when the gear selector is
shifted to REVERSE or to a forward gear and an
obstacle is detected, as long as the system is on.
When the gear selector shifted to NEUTRAL (or
PARK in case of automatic gearbox), the system
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
becomes inactive. When the vehicle is moving
forward, the system will remain active until the
vehicle speed remains below approximately
11 mph (18 km/h). Reducing the speed
approximately below 9 mph (15 km/h), the system
will come back active. When the vehicle is moving
in REVERSE, the system will remain active as long
as the speed remains below the maximum
operating speed of 7 mph (11 km/h). When the
maximum speed limit is exceeded, the system is
disabled and the Park Assist switch LED will
illuminate. The system will become active again if
the vehicle speed reduces below approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
PARK ASSIST SENSORS
The four Park Assist sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 59 inches (150 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction,
depending on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
The four Park Assist sensors, located in the front
fascia/bumper (if equipped), monitor the area in
front of the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field
of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 39 inches
(100 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
PARK ASSIST WARNING DISPLAY
The Park Assist Warning screen will only be
displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected from
the Uconnect system Ú page 123.
The Park Assist Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and
the detected obstacle Ú page 64.
PARK ASSIST DISPLAY
The Park Assist warning screen will be displayed
when an obstacle is detected while the vehicle is in
DRIVE or REVERSE, as long as the vehicle speed is
below 7 mph (11 km/h) when in REVERSE and
below 11 mph (18 km/h) when in DRIVE. When the
vehicle is in REVERSE, the Park Assist warning
screen will always be displayed.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right front or
rear regions based on the object’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right front
or rear region, the display will show a single arc in
the left and/or right front or rear region and the
system will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves
closer to the object, the display will show the single
arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to
fast, to continuous.
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front/Rear/Side ParkSense Arcs
1 — Slow Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following charts show the warning alert
operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
Park Assist will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audible tone.
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
59 inches (150 cm)
59-52 inches
(150-130 cm)
52-41 inches
(130-105 cm)
41-34 inches
(105-85 cm)
34-24 inches
(85-60 cm)
24-12 inches
(60-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None Audible chime increases as the object gets closer to the vehicle Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
39 inches (100 cm)
39-32 inches
(100-80 cm)
32-24 inches
(80-60 cm)
24-12 inches
(60-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None Audible chime increases as the object gets close to the vehicle Continuous
Radio Volume Reduced No Yes
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
Park Assist will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the
vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied. If
the obstacle has been detected within less than
12 inches (30 cm), then the Park Assist will not
turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be
selected from the Customer-Programmable
Features section of the Uconnect system
Ú page 123.
If the Uconnect system is equipped, chime volume
settings will not be accessible from the instrument
cluster display.
The chime volume settings include low, medium,
and high.
Park Assist will retain its last known configuration
state through ignition cycles.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARK
A
SSIST
Park Assist can be enabled and disabled
with the Park Assist switch, located on
the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
When the Park Assist switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster display will
show the “Park Assist Disabled” message for
approximately five seconds Ú page 64.
The Park Assist switch LED will be on when the
Park Assist system is disabled or requires service.
The Park Assist switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the Park Assist switch is
pushed, and the system requires service, the Park
Assist switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the Park Assist System
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will show the "PARK ASSIST
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARK ASSIST
UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARK
ASSIST UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message
for five seconds.
If "PARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle
the ignition. If the message continues to appear
see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
Clean the Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the outer surface and the underside
of the front and rear fascia/bumper are clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction to keep the Park Assist system oper-
ating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Rear Park
Assist.
Clean the Park Assist sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
Park Assist system might not detect an obstacle
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
(Continued)
(Continued)
behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the
fascia/bumper.
Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not
be placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so can result in the system misin-
terpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing a failure indication to be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
If it is necessary to keep the trailer hitch and hitch
ball assembly mounted for a long period, it is
possible to filter out the trailer hitch and hitch ball
assembly presence within the sensor’s field of
view. The filtering operation must be performed
only by an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using Park Assist. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using Park Assist, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure
to do so can result in injury or damage to vehi-
cles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount
and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
WARNING!
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using Park Assist.
CAUTION!
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 STARTING AND OPERATING
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a
forward looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied),
the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel
to prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries. If the driver continues to drift out of
the lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual
warning through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying force to the steering wheel at
any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and
the driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
visual warning through the instrument cluster
display to prompt the driver to remain within the
lane. When only a single lane marking is detected,
a haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provides an
audible warning to the driver if removed. The
system will cancel if the driver does not return their
hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the
end of the turn signal stalk, located on
the left side of the steering column.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button once. A “Lane Sense On”
message is shown in the instrument cluster
display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state (on or off) from the last ignition cycle when
the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument cluster
display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines
are gray when both of the lane boundaries have
not been detected and the LaneSense telltale is
solid white.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white when only the left
lane marking has been detected and the system
is ready to provide visual warnings in the instru-
ment cluster display if a lane departure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left lane line flashes yellow
(on/off), and the LaneSense telltale changes
from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Line/
Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the
right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been detected.
The LaneSense telltale is solid green when both
lane markings have been detected and the
system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if a lane departure
occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the left lane line turns solid yellow.
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left lane line flashes yellow (on/
off). The LaneSense telltale changes from solid
yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Line/
Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the
intensity of the torque warning and the warning
zone sensitivity (early/late) that you can configure
through the Uconnect system screen Ú page 123.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
The system will not apply torque to the steering
wheel whenever a safety system engages.
(Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System,
Electronic Stability Control, Full Brake Control
system, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to
see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of
your vehicle when the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen display along with a note to “Check
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds this note will disappear. The
ParkView camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear license plate.
Back Up Camera Location
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the rear camera mode is
exited and the navigation or audio screen appears
again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/
h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the ignition
is placed in the OFF position.
A touchscreen button to disable the camera is
available when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
Display of the camera image after shifting out of
REVERSE can be disabled via Uconnect Settings.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and
its projected backup path based on the steering
wheel position.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The Capless Fuel system uses a flapper placed at
the filler pipe of the fuel tank; it opens and closes
automatically upon insertion/extraction of the fuel
nozzle.
The Capless Fuel system is designed so that it
prevents the filling of an incorrect type of fuel.
Opening The Door
For filling, proceed as follows:
1. Open the door by pulling the tab outwards.
Filler Door
2. Insert the fuel nozzle in the filler pipe and
proceed with filling the fuel tank.
Filler Pipe
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green
3 ft or greater
(1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
1 — Fuel Filler Door
2 — Dust Cover
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
NOTE:
Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle
to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
4. Pull the nozzle from the filler pipe and then
close the door.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side door or
pillar Ú page 273.
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on
this label and indicates the Month, Day and Hour of
manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems
(GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and
front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight
of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed
in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is
not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components
in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity
(axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or
suspension components sometimes specified by
purchasers for increased durability does not
necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no
occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
WARNING!
Do not affix objects/plugs to the end of the
filler neck other than what is provided on the
car.
The use of objects/plugs do not comply with
the vehicle and may cause pressure increases
inside the tank, creating dangerous condi-
tions.
Do not approach the neck of the tank with
open flames or lit cigarettes its an extreme fire
hazard. Also, avoid close contact with the filler
pipe with your face, do not inhale harmful
vapors.
Do not use your mobile phone in the vicinity of
the pump fuel nozzle, it can be a possible risk
of fire.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
front and rear curb weight values are determined
by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and
ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not
been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle should then be determined separately
to be sure that the load is properly distributed over
the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may
show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles
has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the
weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items
securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles
and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will
assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 112.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight
of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 112.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Also overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch
ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control — Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion to
dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions
while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow
small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer
tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and
the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with
the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a
more level ride, offering more consistent steering
and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and
a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling, stability,
braking performance, and could result in a
collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting
the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Engine Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
1.3L Turbo AWD 2,000 lb (906 kg) with braked trailer 200 lb (90 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the
Tire and Loading Information placard Ú page 269.
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the tire and loading infor-
mation placard for the maximum combined weight
of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow
these guidelines to make your trailer towing as
safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and that it will not shift during travel.
When trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading
can cause a loss of control, poor performance,
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure,
or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
chains to the frame or hook retainers of the
vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the
trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on
a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake
on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle trans-
mission in PARK. Always block or "chock" the
trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
WARNING!
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle Ú page 276.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer Ú page 276.
For the proper tire replacement procedures
Ú page 276. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
brake system, an electronic brake controller is
not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring (If Equipped)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring
harness.
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
brake system and cause it to fail. You might
not have brakes when you need them and
could have a collision.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
distances.
WARNING!
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
into water.
Be sure to reconnect after clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
can use the AutoStick shift control to manually
select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action
will also provide better engine braking.
AutoStick
When using the AutoStick shift control, select
the highest gear that allows for adequate perfor-
mance and avoids frequent downshifts. For
example, choose “5” if the desired speed can be
maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if needed to
maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle
speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle
speed when grade and road conditions allow.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising
speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND
A
NOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature
is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid
inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement. The
Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via
the Customer Programmable Features in the
Uconnect Settings.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the
ground, or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED.
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Information in this section will aid in safe
controlled launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to
pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon
occurs when there is a difference in the surface
traction under the front (driving) wheels.
TOWING
CONDITION
WHEELS OFF
THE GROUND
ALL-WHEEL
DRIVE (AWD)
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
REAR NOT ALLOWED
FRONT NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow appli-
cable state and provincial laws. Contact state
and provincial Highway Safety offices for addi-
tional details.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden
pulling of the front wheels. You could lose
control of the vehicle and possibly have a
collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible
for a wedge of water to build up between the tire
and road surface. This is hydroplaning and may
cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control
and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the
following precautions should be observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads
are slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
Replace the tires when tread wear indicators
first become visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a
collision in a sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following
Cautions and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm
run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road
or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink
into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or
rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases
stopping distances. Therefore, after driving
through standing water, drive slowly and
lightly press on the brake pedal several times
to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom
of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize
wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
or foamy in appearance) after driving through
standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated,
as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause
serious internal damage to the engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
4
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display system
Ú
page 138.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may
be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a
computer or other devices, your vehicle may
require software updates to improve the usability
and performance of your systems or to reduce the
potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or an authorized dealer may contact
you directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer
to “Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement Ú page 78.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
are breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized dealer immediately.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
MULTIMEDIA 123
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the Customer Programmable Features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/
Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn
the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings. Push the center of the control
knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off
and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or
tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4/4 NAV Touchscreen And Faceplate Buttons
For the Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings
button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode, the Uconnect system
allows you to access programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, only press one button at
a time to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting option until a check mark appears next to
the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Once the setting is complete, press the X
button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
button on the right side of the screen will allow you
to toggle up or down through the available settings.
1 — Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Buttons On The Faceplate
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 MULTIMEDIA
Language
Display
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will
display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available
languages are English, Français, and Español.
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
MULTIMEDIA 125
Units
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Touchscreen Beep
This setting will allow you to adjust the touchscreen beep. The setting options
are “On” or “Off”.
Setting Name Description
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in
the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG
[US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and
“Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
Clock
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system.
The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from the system.
The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will also show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the
Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system
will control the time via the GPS location.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the
time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour
format.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
MULTIMEDIA 127
Safety & Driving Assistance
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for
this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-”
setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off
for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The
“-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the date.
Setting Name Description
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Brake Control
Full Brake Control System includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA
applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake
pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Only Warning” option
is selected, a chime sounds alerting you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the
“Warning + Active Braking” option is selected, it applies the brakes to slow
your vehicle in case of a potential forward collision and sounds an audible
chime to alert you. Changing the Full Brake Control System status to “Off”
prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 MULTIMEDIA
Brake Control Sensitivity
The Full Brake Control System Sensitivity setting determines at what relative
distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be at before the system
warns you of a possible collision, based on the option selected. “Far” gives
you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” gives you the least
amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
“Med” gives you a reaction time in between Near and Far.
LaneSense Warning
The LaneSense Warning setting determines at what distance the Lane Control
system warns you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible lane
departure.
LaneSense Strength
This feature allows you to set the lane control strength to “Low”, “Med”, or
“High”.
Park Assist
The Park Assist system setting scans for objects behind the vehicle when the
transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than
7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It provides an alert (audible and/or visual)
to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with
“Sound Only” or “Sound + Display.”
Front Park Assist Volume
This setting will allow you to adjust the Front Park Assist Volume to “Low”,
“Medium”, or “High”.
Rear Park Assist Volume
This setting will allow you to adjust the Rear Park Assist Volume to “Low”,
“Medium”, or “High”.
Setting Name Description
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
MULTIMEDIA 129
Blind Spot Assist
When the Blind Spot Assist feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is activated and shows a visual alert in the outside mirrors, or it shows
a visual alert in the outside mirrors and sounds an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the BSM system is deactivated. If your
vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located,
even if the fascia/bumper is not damaged, the sensor may have become
misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. A sensor that is misaligned results in the BSM not operating to
specification.
Rear View Camera Delay
The Rear View Camera Delay setting determines whether or not the screen
displays the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after
the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay is canceled if the vehicle’s
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the
ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Active Rear View Camera Guidelines
The Active Rear View Camera Guidelines feature overlays the Rear View
Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of
the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel
position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates
the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Rain Sensing Wipers This setting will allow you to turn the rain sensing wipers on or off.
Setting Name Description
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors
Brakes
After pressing the Mirrors button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Folding Side Mirrors This setting will allow you to turn the auto folding side mirrors on or off.
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Brake Service
Selecting the Brake Service feature will display a pop-up asking whether or
not you would like to retract the park brakes to the brake system service.
Auto Park Brake This setting will allow you to turn the auto park brake on or off.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
MULTIMEDIA 131
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Interior Ambient Lights
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the brightness of the
interior ambient lighting.
Headlight Sensitivity
This setting will allow you to adjust the headlight sensitivity to minimum
sensitivity, medium sensitivity, or maximum sensitivity.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the headlight off delay to “0”, “30”, “60”, or
“90” seconds.
Greeting Lights This setting will allow you to turn the greeting lights on or off.
High Beam Control This setting will allow you to turn the high beam control on or off.
Daytime Running Lights
When the Daytime Running Lights feature is selected, the daytime running
lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only available if allowed by law in
the country of the vehicle purchase.
Cornering Lights
When this feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or
the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) turns on,
on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flash lights with lock on or off.
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the
vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
When the Auto Unlock On Exit feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position and the driver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flash lights with lock on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will allow you to set the Sound Horn With Lock feature “Off”, “1st
Press”, or “2nd Press”.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will allow you to turn horn with remote start on or off.
Keyless Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having
to press the key fob lock or unlock button.
Remote Door Unlock
When “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first
push of the key fob Unlock button; you must push the key fob Unlock button
twice to unlock the passengers’ doors. When “All” is programmed, all of the
doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob Unlock button.
If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry-equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the
driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grabbed. Touching the
handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door unlocking. If the
driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to
unlock all doors (or use key fob).
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
MULTIMEDIA 133
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems
Audio
When the Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort
systems when remote start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heat Seat & Steering Wheel
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started.
The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start”
setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The
“All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is
started.
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and
left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the
volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are
“Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX
port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
Loudness This setting will improve sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
Auto-On Radio
This setting will have the radio automatically turn on when the vehicle is in ON/
RUN or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition OFF. The available
options are “On”, “Off”, and “Last Recall”.
Setting Name Description
When the Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings concerning electronics during vehicle shut off.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Radio Off Delay
This setting will keep the radio on after the vehicle has been shut off. The
available options are “0 MIN” and “20 MIN”
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
MULTIMEDIA 135
Phone/Bluetooth®
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws. Your attention should be focused on safely
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death.
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The settings are “Auto
Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom
Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used
to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a
music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will
display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Info
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel
Link is a separate subscription.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
MULTIMEDIA 137
Restore Settings
Clear Personal Data
When the Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to resetting the system back to its default.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings
When this feature is selected, it will reset Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio
Settings to their default.
When he Clear Personal Data button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the option to clear personal data saved to the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature setting’s may vary.
Setting Name Description
Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected, it will remove personal data including
Bluetooth® devices and presets.
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display
1 — Radio Button 5 — Nav Button
2 — Media Button 6 — Phone Button
3 — Climate Button 7 — Settings Button
4 — Apps Button
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
MULTIMEDIA 139
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Mode and access the radio
functions and external audio sources Ú page 141.
Phone
Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free phone system
Ú
page 152.
Settings Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 123.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Uconnect apps.
Climate
Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate control functions
Ú page 43.
Nav (Navigation) — If Equipped
Press the Nav button to enter Navigation Mode and use the system’s built-in Navigation software
Ú page 166.
Push the Enter/Browse button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted selection on the screen.
Rotate the Tune/Scroll rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the Mute button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system off. Push it again to
turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & On/Off button on the faceplate to
turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the Volume & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to reset the radio
manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen from freezing or being stuck.
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 MULTIMEDIA
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily customized for your
preference. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display Drag & Drop
1. Press the Apps button to open the App
screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected app to
replace an existing shortcut in the main menu
bar.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using the
system. It contains instructions on how to use the
system in a safe and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety precautions.
Failure to do so may result in injury or property
damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. If
prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to
the product. See an authorized dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a
level that still allows you to hear outside traffic
and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use the
system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on the
system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture
away from the system. Besides damage to the
system, moisture can cause electric shocks as
with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed
dependent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
MULTIMEDIA 141
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or
sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.),
which could scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on
the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens
cleaning cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solu-
tion ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent
manufacturer's precautions and directions
Ú page 297.
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on
the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three
and nine o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center and controls the
volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing
the top of the rocker switch will increase the
volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available (AM/
FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on which
mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for the
next available station and pushing the bottom of
the switch will Seek Down for the next available
station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that you
have programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go
forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch
goes to the beginning of the current track, or the
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play.
Double pressing the bottom button switch will skip
to the previous track if it is after eight seconds into
the current track.
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter
the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM,
FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pressing the
corresponding button in Radio Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the Volume & On/Off control knob to turn on
and off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping.
Turning the Volume & On/Off control knob
clockwise increases the volume, and
counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will
be set at the same volume level as last played.
Mute Button
Push the Mute button to mute or unmute the
system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the
radio station frequency. Push the Enter/Browse
button to choose a selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by
pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pushing the left steering wheel
audio control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek
Down button to tune the radio to the next
available station or channel. During a Seek Up/
Down function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band two
times, the radio will stop at the station where it
began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up
or Seek Down button to advance the radio
through the available stations or channels at a
faster rate. The radio stops at the next available
station or channel when the button on the
touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
1 — Radio Bands
2 — Preset Radio Stations
3 — View Next Preset Radio Stations
4 — Status Bar
5 — Browse Button
6 — Seek Down
7 — Tune Button
8 — Seek Up
9 — Audio Settings
10 — Bottom Menu Bar
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
MULTIMEDIA 143
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the
radio screen to directly tune to a desired radio
station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station.
Once a number has been entered, any numbers
that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be
reached) will become deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been entered,
press “Ok”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and
the system will automatically tune to that station.
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like
to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel and
wait for the beep to say a command. See an
example below:
“
Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “
Help”. The system
provides you with a list of commands.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display Changing To
SiriusXM®
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at
866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM®
Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca
(Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change.
SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
US and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also
available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite
service area and in AK. © 2021 SiriusXM® Radio
Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio
does not receive a signal in underground parking
garages or tunnels.
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 MULTIMEDIA
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the
radio does not have the necessary subscription,
the radio is able to receive the Preview channel
only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US residents visit http://
www.siriusxm.com/getallaccess or call:
1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/
or call: 1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top
of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in
the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed
below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions
common to all radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
Weather button, and Favorite button functions are
available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio
1 — Browse
2 — Replay
3 — Seek Down Button
4 — Direct Tune Button
5 — Seek Up Button
6 — Audio Settings Button
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
MULTIMEDIA 145
REPLAY
Replay provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched, content in replay
memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to
pause the playing of live or rewound content at any
time. Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/
Play button again on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to
rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen for
more than two seconds rewinds the content. The
radio begins playing the content at the point at
which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five
seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be
done when the content is previously rewound, and
therefore, cannot be done for live content. A
continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio
begins playing the content at the point at which the
press is release.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to
resume the playing of live content.
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 MULTIMEDIA
FAVORITES
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to
activate the favorites menu, which will time out
within 20 seconds in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X
button.
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite
artist or song that is currently playing. The radio
then uses this information to alert you when either
the favorite artist or song is being played at any
time by any of the SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite artist, press the Favorites button on the
touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist button on
the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite song, press the Favorites button on the
touchscreen and then the Favorite Song button on
the touchscreen.
BROWSE IN SXM
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display Browse Button
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit submenus to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When
pressing the All button, the following categories
become available:
Channel List: Press the Channel List to display
all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the Tune/Scroll knob.
Genre List: Press the Genre button on the touch-
screen to display a list of Genres. You can select
any desired Genre by pressing the Genre List.
The radio tunes to a channel with the content in
the selected Genre.
Presets — If Equipped
Press the Presets button (if equipped) located at
the left of the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the
Tune/Scroll knob as well.
Preset Selection
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse
button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the
currently highlighted Preset. When selected, the
Radio tunes to the station stored in the Preset.
1 — All Button
2 — Presets Button
3 — Favorites Button
4 — Game Zone Button
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
MULTIMEDIA 147
Deleting A Preset
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the
Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings,
along with providing a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the
Tune/Scroll knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or press
the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu allows
you to choose from a visual alert or audible and
visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on
any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of
the Browse screen. This feature provides you with
the ability to select teams, edit the selection, and
set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio
to that channel.
Select Team — If Equipped
Press the Select Team button on the touchscreen
to activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen
league and a scroll list of all teams within the
league will appear, then you can select a team by
pressing the corresponding box. A check mark
appears for all teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or press
the Trash Can icon next to the selection to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen.
The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from
“Alert me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert
upon score update” or both when one or more of
your selections is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music channel
using one of the 12 presets. This feature occurs
the first time the preset is selected during that
current song.
Setting Presets
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display Radio Presets
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 MULTIMEDIA
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and
are activated by pressing any of the Preset
buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save as
a preset, press and hold the numbered button on
the touchscreen for more than two seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio Modes.
A total of six presets will appear on the screen. You
can switch between the radio presets list by
pressing the Arrow button located in the upper
right of the radio touchscreen.
PRESET FEATURES — IF EQUIPPED
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen
provides a means to edit the Presets List and is
entered by pushing the Enter/Browse button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can scroll
the preset list by rotation of the Tune/Scroll knob
or by pressing the Up or Down Arrow keys, located
on the right of the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse
button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the
currently highlighted Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station
stored in the Presets.
Deleting Presets
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen by
pressing the X button or the Back Arrow button
when in the Browse Presets screen.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
The audio settings can also be accessed on the
Radio Mode screen by pressing the Audio button.
You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the
X button.
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display
1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Sped Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound
5 — Loudness
6 — AUX Volume Offset
7 — Radio Off With Door
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
MULTIMEDIA 149
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between
the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.
Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right button or press and drag the red Speaker
icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or – button or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease
each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or
minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and
“3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation
to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to
compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction
as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This alters the
AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus
three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play — If Equipped
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is
connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press
“Off” to turn the setting off.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the
driver or passenger door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay selected time
has expired.
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display Operating Media
Mode
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source
Select button on the touchscreen and the desired
mode button on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and
Bluetooth® are the Media sources available.
When available, you can select the Browse button
on the touchscreen to be given these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the Info
button on the touchscreen for artist information on
the current song playing.
Types of Media Modes
USB MODE
Overview
USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into
the USB port, by selecting the USB button on the
left side of the touchscreen, or by selecting the
Source Select/Select Source button and then
selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped).
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode
is entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device,
containing music, to the Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be
paired to the Uconnect Phone to communicate
with the Uconnect system.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth®
button on the left side of the touchscreen or under
the Source Select/Select Source button (if
equipped).
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display Select Source
1 — Select Source
2 — Repeat
3 — Track Time
4 — Shuffle
5 — Info
6 — Browse
7 — Tracks
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
MULTIMEDIA 151
AUX MODE
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX
device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into
the AUX port or by pressing the AUX button on the
left side of the touchscreen, or under the Source
Select button (if equipped).
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the
radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode and
begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting
playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be
provided by the radio; use the device controls
instead. Adjust the volume with the Volume button,
Volume/Mute rotary knob, or the On/Off rotary
knob, or with the volume of the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the
volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too
low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the
radio unit to play the music on the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device. Press and release the Seek Down button
on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or to return to the beginning
of the previous selection if the USB device is within
the first three seconds of the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek
Up button on the touchscreen for the next
selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen
to return to the beginning of the current selection,
or return to the beginning of the previous selection
if the Bluetooth® device is within the first second
of the current selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to display the browse window. In USB
Mode, the left side of the browse window displays
a list of ways you can browse through the contents
of the USB device. If supported by the device, you
can browse by Folder, Artist, Playlist, Album, Song,
etc. Press the desired button on the touchscreen
on the left side of the screen. The center of the
browse window shows items and their
sub-functions, which can be scrolled through by
pressing the Up and Down buttons to the right. The
Tune/Scroll knob can also be used to scroll.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
the touchscreen to select the desired audio
source: Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. The
Repeat button on the touchscreen is highlighted
when active. The Radio will continue to play the
current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat is
active. Press the Repeat button again to enter
Repeat All. The radio will continue to play all the
current tracks, repeatedly, as long as the repeat
function is active. To cancel Repeat, press the
Repeat button a third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen to play the selections on the USB
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
Audio button Ú page 142.
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 MULTIMEDIA
Info
In USB Mode, press the Info button on the
touchscreen to display the current track
information. Press the Info or X button on the
touchscreen a second time to cancel this feature.
Tracks
In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the
touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song List.
The song currently playing is indicated by an arrow
and lines above and below the song title. When in
the Tracks List screen you can rotate the Tune/
Scroll knob to highlight a track (indicated by the
line above and below the track name) and then
push the Enter/Browse knob to start playing that
track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
supports this feature, press the Tracks button on
the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song
List. The currently playing song is indicated by a red
arrow and lines above and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®,
and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering
wheel. After the beep, say one of the following
commands and follow the prompts to switch your
media source or choose an artist:
“
Change source to Bluetooth®”
“
Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest
Hits”; “
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre
Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match exactly
how the artist, album, song, and genre information
is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to
dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith
Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for
John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they
are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call
logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy
access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
MULTIMEDIA 153
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through
your vehicle’s audio system; the system will
automatically mute your radio when using the
Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call
877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as you
enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute
the system's microphone for private conversation.
The Phone feature is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
global standard that enables different electronic
devices to connect to each other without wires or a
docking station. Ensure you phone is turned on with
Bluetooth® active and has been paired to the
Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile phones or audio
devices are allowed to be linked to the system. Only
one linked (or paired) mobile phone and one audio
device can be used with the system at a time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel
is used to get into the Phone Mode and
make calls, show recent, incoming or
outgoing calls, view phonebook, etc.
When you push the button you will hear a BEEP.
The BEEP is your signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your
steering wheel is only used for “barge in”
and when you are already in a call or
want to make another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used to
access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice
Command features if your vehicle is equipped.
Phone Operation
OPERATION
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu
structure. Voice commands are required after
most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two
general methods for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and
then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait
for the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt
or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound commands
can be used. For example, instead of saying
“Call” and then “John Smith” and then “mobile”,
the following compound command can be said:
“Call John Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the voice
command is given. You can also break the
commands into parts and say each part of the
command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,”
or you can break the compound command form
into two voice commands: “Search Contacts”
and when asked, “John Smith.” Please
remember, the Uconnect Phone works best
when you talk in a normal conversational tone,
as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 MULTIMEDIA
NATURAL SPEECH
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences. The
system filters out certain non-word utterances and
sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The system handles
fill-in words such as “I would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone call”
and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in the
same phrase or sentence, the system identifies
the topic or context and provides the associated
follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to
call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not
recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
system requires more information from the user, it
will ask a question to which the user can respond
without pushing the Voice Command button on the
steering wheel.
HELP COMMAND
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want
to know your options at any prompt, say “Help”
following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply
push the Phone button (if active) on your steering
wheel and say a command or say “Help”. All Phone
sessions begin with a push of the VR button or the
Phone button.
CANCEL COMMAND
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel”
and you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button
on your steering wheel when the system is listening
for a command and be returned to the main or
previous menu.
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
PHONE
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
To begin using your Uconnect
Phone, you must pair your
compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone
pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to
reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please
visit UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile
phone compatibility information.
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow the steps below to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user
enters Phone Mode and no other device(s)
have previously been paired. If the system
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
MULTIMEDIA 155
has a phone previously paired, even if no
phone is currently connected with the
system, this pop-up will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone
will begin to search for Bluetooth® connec-
tions.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the PIN
from the pop-up on your mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing
or Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button or the Add
Device button.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the connec-
tion request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect
system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept
the connection request from Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect system
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only
one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth®
audio device can be connected to the
Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected,
simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile
phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and
the Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which
it was paired. The most recent phone paired will
have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
system to access your “messages” and “contacts”.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen
on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect
system may interfere with the Bluetooth®
connection. If this happens, simply repeat the
pairing process. However, first make sure to delete
the device from the list of phones on your
Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s
Bluetooth® settings.
PAIR A BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
DEVICE
1. Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
begin.
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
touchscreen to display the Paired Audio
Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When
prompted on the device, confirm the PIN
shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device
the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within
range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in which
it was paired. The most recent device paired will
have the higher priority.
You can also use a following VR command to bring
up a list of paired audio devices:
“Show Paired Phones”
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the
highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device
within range. If you need to choose a particular
phone or audio device follow these steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources
button.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR
AUDIO DEVICE
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
button.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources
button.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right
of the device name for a different phone or
audio device than the currently connected
device or press the preferred Connected
Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
FAVORITE
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen,
press the Settings button located to the right
of the device name for a different phone or
audio device than the currently connected
device or press the preferred “Connected
Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
1 — Disconnect Device or Disconnect Phone
2 — Make Favorite
3 — Delete Device/Phone
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
MULTIMEDIA 157
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has
the ability to download contact names and number
entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook
Access Profile may support this feature. Your
mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking for
permission for the Uconnect system to access your
messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow”
will sync your contacts with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com,
for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook, Ú page 161.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made
to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four
numbers per contact will be downloaded and
updated every time a phone is connected to the
Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay before
the latest downloaded names can be used. Until
then, if available, the previously downloaded
phonebook is available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently connected
mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited
or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can
only be edited on the mobile phone. The
changes are transferred and updated to
Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection.
MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen, and
then press one of the +Add Favorite Contact
buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press the
Down Arrow button or the Settings Gear button
next to the selected number to display the
option’s pop-up. In the pop-up, select “Add to
Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from
the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the
Settings Gear icon next to the contact you want
to remove from your favorites. This will bring
up the options for that Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available
and supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile
service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that
you have.
Listed below are the phone options with Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 MULTIMEDIA
CALL CONTROLS
The touchscreen allows you to control the following
call features:
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the
touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and press
“Dial/Call”.
RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of
the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your steering
wheel and perform the above operation. For
example, say “Show my incoming calls”.
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio
system. Push the Phone button on the steering
wheel, press the Answer button on the
touchscreen.
You can also press the Caller ID box to place the
current call on hold or answer the incoming call.
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display
1 — Answer
2 — End
3 — Mute/Unmute
4 — Transfer
5 — Join Calls
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
MULTIMEDIA 159
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support
rejecting an incoming call when another call is in
progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an
incoming call or ignore it.
DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications
from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep
your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For
your convenience, there is a counter display to
keep track of your missed calls and text messages
while Do Not Disturb is active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to 160
characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP).
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold
button on the Phone main screen.
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
CALL IS IN PROGRESS
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold
button on the Phone main screen, then dial a
number from the keypad (if supported by your
mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the
phonebooks.
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the Swap Calls button on the phone
main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold
at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
JOIN CALLS
When two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the
Phone main screen to combine all calls into a
conference call.
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 MULTIMEDIA
CALL TERMINATION
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone
End button on the steering wheel. Only the active
call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on
hold, it will become the new active call.
REDIAL
Push the VR button and after the
“Listening” prompt and the following
beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
CALL CONTINUATION
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call
on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition
has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system
until the phone becomes out of range for the
Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to
press the Transfer button on the touchscreen
when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
PHONE
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your connected mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer
button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
VOICE COMMAND
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
Ensure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not always
work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names in
your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in
motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
when the entries are not similar. You can say “O”
(letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume
all risks related to the use of the Uconnect
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to
do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
MULTIMEDIA 161
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and
network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
PHONE VOICE COMMANDS
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is
ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile
phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to
say a command. See some examples below:
“
Call John Smith”
“Dial 123 456 7890”
“
Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
“Call back” (call previously answered incoming
phone number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command,
push the Phone button and say “
Call”, then
pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your
phonebook. When a contact has multiple phone
numbers, you can say “
Call John Smith work”.
VOICE TEXT REPLY — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect can announce incoming text messages.
Push the VR button or Phone button and
say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an incoming
text message. (Must have compatible mobile
phone paired to Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messag-
es and follow the system prompts.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose the
message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the
full implementation of the
Message Access Profile
(MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on your
Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s® “User
Manual”.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 MULTIMEDIA
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible
with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a
text message.
SIRI® EYES FREE — IF EQUIPPED
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected
to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use
your voice to send text messages, select media,
place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean
and responds back to confirm your requests. The
system is designed to keep your eyes on the road
and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, you
can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
connection can generally be re-established by
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone is
recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
POWER-UP
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either
the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language
change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to
using the system Ú page 297.
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® —
IF EQUIPPED
ANDROID AUTO™
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
Android Auto™ is a feature of your
Uconnect system, and your
Android™ 6.0 or higher powered
smartphone with a data plan, that
allows you to project your
smartphone and a number of its apps onto the
touchscreen radio display. Android Auto™ brings
you useful information, and organizes it into simple
cards that appear just when they are needed.
Android Auto™ can be used with speech
technology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs
and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the radio
display’s touchscreen to control many of your
apps. To use Android Auto™, perform the following
procedure:
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™
features may or may not be available in every
region and/or language.
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the
Google Play store on your Android™-powered
smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered smartphone
to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle.
If the Android Auto™ app was not downloaded,
the first time you plug your device in the app
begins to download. Your vehicle should be in
PARK the first time you use the app.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable that
came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may
not work.
Android Auto™ And LTE Data Coverage
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
MULTIMEDIA 163
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio screen.
Data plan rates apply.
3. Once the device is connected and recognized,
the Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar
changes to the Android Auto™ icon.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ is set to launch immediately once a
compatible device is connected. You can also
launch it by pressing the Android Auto™ icon on the
touchscreen.
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
YouTube Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for
music
Hands-free calling and texting for communica-
tion
Various compatible apps
Maps
Push and hold the Voice Recognition (VR)
button on the steering wheel until the
beep or tap the Microphone icon to ask
Google to take you to a desired
destination by voice. You can also touch the
Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access other
navigation apps.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
provides voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
For further information, refer to www.android.com/
auto/ (US) or https://www.android.com/intl/
en_ca/auto/ (Canada).
For further information on the navigation function,
please refer to https://support.google.com/
android or https://support.google.com/
androidauto/.
Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access and
stream your favorite music with apps like
YouTube Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify.
Using your smartphone’s data plan, you
can stream endless music on the road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up
on your smartphone prior to using Android Auto™
for them to work with Android Auto™.
NOTE:
To see the track details for the music playing
through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect
system’s media screen.
For further information, refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, push and
hold the VR button on the steering wheel
to activate voice recognition specific to
Android Auto™. This allows you to send
and reply to text messages, have incoming text
messages read out loud, and place and receive
hands-free calls.
Apps
The Android Auto™ App displays all the compatible
apps that are available to use with Android Auto™,
every time it is launched. You must have the
compatible app downloaded, and you must be
signed in to the app through your mobile device for
it to work with Android Auto™.
Refer to https://play.google.com/store/apps/ to
see the latest list of available apps for Android
Auto™.
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 MULTIMEDIA
Android Auto™ Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™
features may or may not be available in every
region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice recognition
system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to
project your Android™-powered smartphone and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android™ 6.0 or higher
to one of the media USB ports, using the
factory-provided USB cable, and press the new
Android Auto™ icon that replaces your “Phone”
icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto™.
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel,
or press and hold the “Microphone” icon within
Android Auto™, to activate Android™’s VR, which
recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of
your smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™ on your car display, you’ll
need an Android phone running Android 6.0 or
higher, an active data plan, and the Android
Auto™ app.
To wirelessly use Android Auto™ on your car
display, you need a compatible Android smart-
phone with an active data plan. You can check
which smartphones are compatible at g.co/
androidauto/requirements.
Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
APPLE CARPLAY®
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
Uconnect works seamlessly with
Apple CarPlay®, the smarter,
more secure way to use your
iPhone® in the car, and stay
focused on the road. Use your
Uconnect Touchscreen display, the vehicle's knobs
and controls, and your voice with Siri to get access
to Apple Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are using
iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings,
ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for the very first
connection only, and then use the following
procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable
that came with your phone, as aftermarket cables
may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and recognized,
the Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar
changes to the Apple CarPlay® Icon.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately. You
can also launch it by pressing the Apple CarPlay®
icon on the touchscreen.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
MULTIMEDIA 165
Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular
data is turned on, and that you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Your data and cellular coverage
is shown on the left side of the radio screen. Data
plan rates apply.
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold the
VR button on the steering wheel to
activate a Siri voice recognition session.
You can also press and hold the Home
button within Apple CarPlay® to start talking to Siri.
This allows you to make calls or listen to voicemail
as you normally would using Siri on your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
steering wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR
session, not a Siri session, and it will not function
with Apple CarPlay®.
Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all
your artists, playlists, and music from
iTunes® or any third party application
installed on your device. Using your
iPhone’s® data plan, you can also use select third
party audio apps including music, news, sports,
podcasts, and more.
Messages
Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel to activate a Siri voice
recognition session. Apple CarPlay®
allows you to use Siri to send or reply to
text messages. Siri can also read incoming text
messages, but drivers will not be able to read
messages, as everything is done via voice.
Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel until the beep or tap the
Microphone icon to ask Apple® Siri to
take you to a desired destination by
voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon in
Apple CarPlay® to access Apple® Maps.
Apps
The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible apps
that are available to use, every time it is launched.
You must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app through your
mobile device for it to work with Apple CarPlay®.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ (US)
or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/
(Canada) to see the latest list of available apps for
Apple CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay®
features may not be available in every region and/
or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your iPhone® and a number of
its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect
your iPhone® 5 or higher to one of the media USB
1 — LTE Data Coverage
2 — Apple CarPlay® Icon
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 MULTIMEDIA
ports, using the factory-provided Lightning cable,
and press the new Apple CarPlay® icon that
replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar
to begin Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate
Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands to
use a list of your iPhone’s® features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps — If Equipped
Additional Apps — If Equipped
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., registered
in the US and other countries. Apple® terms of use
and privacy statements apply.
ANDROID AUTO™ AND APPLE
C
ARPLAY® TIPS AND TRICKS
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic
Bluetooth® Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple
CarPlay® for the first time and undergoing the
setup procedure, the smartphone pairs to the
Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any setup
required every time it is within range, if Bluetooth®
is turned on.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while
Android Auto™ uses both USB and Bluetooth®
connections to function. The connected device is
unavailable to other devices when connected
using Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect
System — If Equipped
It is possible to have multiple devices connected to
the Uconnect system. For example, if using Android
Auto™/Apple CarPlay®, the connected device will
be used to place hands-free phone calls or send
hands-free text messages. However, another
device can also be paired to the Uconnect system,
via Bluetooth®, as an audio source, so the
passenger can stream music.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ can only be
launched from the front and center console USB
ports.
NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED
NAVIGATION MAIN MENU
To access the Navigation system, press the Nav
button on the touchscreen.
Navigation Main Menu
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
MULTIMEDIA 167
Search
Press to search for a Point Of Interest (POI) or
specific address.
Current Route
Press to view and edit the current route. This menu
option is only available when navigating to a
destination.
My Places
Press to select from a list of saved destinations,
including the saved Home address, Work address,
and Recent destinations.
Parking
Press to open the map view with the nearest
parking locations.
Gas Station
Press to open the map view with the nearest gas
station locations.
Settings
Press to open up the settings menu and alter map
and route settings.
Help Press to open up the help menu.
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 MULTIMEDIA
NAVIGATING A ROUTE
Navigation Route View
Once a route is programmed, the map view will be
displayed and highlight the route as a light blue
bar. The route tracker is on the right side of the
screen and shows the time and distance to the
final destination. It also indicates stops and other
points of interest along the way with icons that
move closer as you near them. The direction
distance is displayed at the top of the screen, and
the main menu can be accessed at any time by
pressing the Menu button: the four white dots in
the bottom left-hand corner of the screen. The
route will continue to display behind the menu as
you travel along it.
SEARCH
Search
To search for a destination and start navigation,
follow these steps:
1. While in the Navigation Main Menu, press the
Search button.
2. If searching using an address, begin typing the
address on the keyboard. If searching the
name of a destination, press “Point of Interest”
first before typing.
3. Select the location from the list. The display
will switch to the map view and will show the
location of the selected destination.
4. Press the Navigate button — the red steering
wheel icon — to begin navigating to the
selected location.
NOTE:
Pressing the More button, the three dot icon, next
to the Navigate button brings up the options to add
the destination to the My Places menu, add the
destination to the current route, and more. Within
More, you can use the destination as a starting
point and view information about the location.
1 — Navigation View Button
2 — Zoom Button
3 — Next Turn Instructions
4 — Arrival Time and Distance
5 — Main Menu Button
6 — Points Of Interest On Route
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
MULTIMEDIA 169
CURRENT ROUTE
From the Navigation Main Menu, press the Current
Route button on the touchscreen and select one of
the following to adjust or change your current
route.
NOTE:
Current Route can only be selected from the Navi-
gation Main Menu if the navigation system is
currently navigating to a destination.
Current Route Options
Clear Route
Press this button on the touchscreen to clear the current route from the Navigation
system.
Change Route Type
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the current routes type to one of the
below options:
Fastest route: routes the vehicle to the destination using the roads that will take the
least amount of time.
Shortest route: routes the vehicle to the destination using the roads that will be the
shortest amount of total distance traveled.
Most eco-friendly route: routes the vehicle to the destination using the roads that will
use the least amount of fuel.
Avoid interstate highways: routes the vehicle to the destination avoiding all interstate
highways.
Find Alternative
Press this button on the touchscreen to view an overhead view of your route, along with
several others to choose from. Each with the time difference between your current route
and these new ones. Select the colored button that corresponds to the new route you
want to take.
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 MULTIMEDIA
Avoid Blocked Road
Press this button on the touchscreen to select a road you wish to avoid on your route that
is blocked.
Avoid Part Of Route
Press this button on the touchscreen to bring up the list of directions for your current
route. Select the part of the route you wish to avoid and the system will reroute the
navigation track to your destination.
Avoid On This Route
Press this button on the touchscreen to select certain types of roads to avoid on your
navigational route.
Show Instructions Press this button on the touchscreen to view the directions of your route in list form.
Add Stop To Route
Press this button on the touchscreen to add an additional stop to your current route.
Pressing the Search button will bring up the keyboard where you can type in the address
or name of the destination you wish to add.
Reorder Stops Press this button on the touchscreen to reorder the different stops on the current route.
Play Route Preview
Press this button on the touchscreen to begin a simulated preview of what your route will
look like. The vehicle icon will begin traveling along your route until it reaches its
destination. You can also end the preview by returning to the Current Route menu and
selecting Stop Route Preview.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
MULTIMEDIA 171
MY PLACES
My Places
From the Navigation Main Menu, press the My
Places button on the touchscreen to display a list
of saved destinations. The following destinations
are selectable along with any other destinations
that have been saved.
Home
Press the Home button to navigate to the saved
Home destination. If no Home destination is saved,
the Navigation system will ask you to search for the
destination to save as your Home destination.
Work
Press the Work button to navigate to the saved
Work destination. If no Work destination is saved,
the Navigation system will ask you to search for the
destination to save as your Work destination.
Recent Destinations
Press Recent Destinations button on the
touchscreen to display a list of destinations the
Navigation system has recently routed to for you to
select.
NOTE:
The Add and Edit List buttons allow you to add,
remove, and reorder destinations that appear
within the list.
Editing My Places
PARKING
Searching For Parking
From the Navigation Main Menu, press the Parking
button on the touchscreen to bring up a view of
your current location on the map. Within this map
view, blue “P” icons will appear pointing out the
locations of nearby parking lots. Press the desired
parking lot icon to bring up the location, and select
the steering wheel icon to navigate to it.
1 — Recent Destination Button
2 — Home Button
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 MULTIMEDIA
GAS STATIONS
Searching For Gas Stations
From the Navigation Main Menu, press the Gas
Stations button on the touchscreen to bring up a
view of your current location on the map. Within
this map view, white “Gas Station” icons will
appear pointing out the locations of nearby gas
stations. Press the desired gas station icon to bring
up its location, and select the steering wheel icon
to navigate to it.
SETTINGS
Navigation Settings
From the Navigation Main Menu, press the
Settings button to open up the Settings menu. The
following settings categories are selectable within
the Settings Main Menu:
Appearance
Press this button to adjust the appearance settings of the Navigation system. The
appearance settings allow you to alter whether or not the system switches to night colors
when it is dark, change the arrival information that is displayed, change what appears on
the route (i.e. highway exits), when the system automatically zooms, and adjust the
guidance view style from 3D, 2D and whether or not to show the 3D car icon.
Voices
Press this button to adjust what the Navigation system calls out while navigating. The
voices settings allow you to turn on and off whether the system reads early instructions,
sign information, road numbers, street names, and foreign street names out loud.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
MULTIMEDIA 173
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition may
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless
radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in
(20 cm) or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio Ú page 297.
Route Planning
Press this button to adjust the route planning features of the Navigation system. The
route planning settings allow you to change whether or not the system will prompt you
when a faster route is available, which type of route it should plan when setting one (i.e.
fastest, shortest, most eco-friendly, or to avoid interstate highways), and what to avoid on
every route.
Sounds & Warnings
Press this button to adjust how the Navigation system should warn you during a route.
The sounds and warnings settings allows you to set the warning type the system will
sound, and whether or not to warn you when the vehicle is traveling above the speed
limit.
System
Press this button to reset the Navigation system. This will reset the Navigation system to
its factory setting and remove all saved data.
Help
Press the question mark icon to enter the Help menu. Within the Help menu, you may
view the “About” page that displays system information.
5
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and
brake performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle
is started and driven. During this self-check, you
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are beginning
to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops
may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
The ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop).
Brake pedal pulsations.
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop.
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification
may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion
of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally if
the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer-
ence caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qual-
ified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
SAFETY 175
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
is placed in ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired
as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system
includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Dynamic Steering Torque
(DST), Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD),
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and
Traction Control System (TCS). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake
system is not functioning properly and that
immediate service is required. If the Brake System
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and amount
of brake application and then applies optimum
pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released,
the BAS is deactivated.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the ESC and Electric Power
Steering (EPS) modules that provides torque at the
steering wheel for certain driving conditions in
which the ESC module is detecting vehicle
instability. The torque that the steering wheel
receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/
maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the
driver receives that the feature is active is the
torque applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small
torques on the steering wheel, which means the
effectiveness of the DST feature is highly
dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and overall
reaction to the applied torque. It is very important
to realize that this feature will not steer the vehicle,
meaning the driver is still responsible for steering
the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to
prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle
instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
entering ABS before the front axle.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent collisions, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a
BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 SAFETY
(Continued)
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle
and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen
the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during
severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, striking
objects or other vehicles.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to counteract the above conditions.
Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to flash
as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when the TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence the
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM
cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
especially those that involve leaving the roadway
or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
or the safety of others.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to
inappropriate driver input for the conditions.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
SAFETY 177
ESC Operation Modes
To disable ESC and other active safety systems,
follow the instruction below.
There are two operation modes of active safety
systems on the vehicle:
ESC On
Partial Off
ESC On
All active safety systems are enabled. This is the
normal operating mode when driving a vehicle.
This mode should be used in most driving
conditions. The system will be in "ESC On" mode
every time the engine is started
NOTE:
You are advised to select "Partial Off " mode only
for specific driving requirements.
Partial Off
By pressing the ESC OFF button located below the
radio screen when driving, the intervention of the
ESC and TCS systems is limited to braking action
on the single wheels.
The other systems remain enabled. Activation of
this mode is indicated by the warning lamp on the
instrument panel switching on (if equipped,
together with a message on the display).
To restore "ESC On" operating mode, press the
button below the radio screen again.
"ESC On" mode will automatically reactivate every
time the engine is started.
NOTE:
When traveling on snowy roads with snow chains,
it may be helpful to activate "Partial Off" mode: in
these conditions, you can obtain better traction by
slipping the drive wheels.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a
short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for
HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and
may negatively affect the performance of the
ESC system. Changes to the steering system,
suspension, braking system, tire type and size
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte-
nance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING!
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, except for the limited slip feature
described in the Traction Control System (TCS)
section, has been disabled and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is
reduced.
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 SAFETY
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the trans-
mission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles
equipped with a manual transmission, if the
clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current settings in the instrument
cluster display see Ú page 64.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of
each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the
spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce vehicle power to
provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A
feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD)
functions similarly to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
other, the system will apply the brake of the
spinning wheel. This will allow more vehicle torque
to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD
may remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in
reduced modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the
rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.)
that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/
side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light
will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
and enters standby mode when the vehicle is in
PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one
lane width on both sides of the vehicle, 10 ft (3 m).
The zone length starts at the outside mirror and
extends approximately 20 ft (6 m) beyond the rear
fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will
alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
not a substitute for active driving involvement. It
is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people,
and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision or
serious personal injury.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
SAFETY 179
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
If a trailer is connected to the vehicle, it is neces-
sary to deactivate BSM system manually by
settings menu to avoid a misdetection
Ú page 123.
The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the
radar sensors are located must remain free of
snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the
BSM system can function properly. Do not block
the radar sensors located on the rear fascia/
bumper with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
Rear Sensor Locations
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning
light located in the outside mirrors, in addition to
sounding an audible (chime) alert (whenever the
turn signal is activated) and reducing the radio
volume Ú page 181.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM
system will issue an alert during these types of
zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with
a relative speed of less than 31 mph (50 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 SAFETY
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (25 km/h) and the vehicle
remains in the blind spot for approximately
1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated.
If the difference in speed between the two vehicles
is greater than 15 mph (25 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts,
walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally
the system may alert on such objects. This is
normal operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle
in adjacent lanes Ú page 297.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
The BSM system is not designed to detect
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
SAFETY 181
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out
of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
cautiously out of the parking space until the rear
end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 1 mph (2 km/h), to objects
moving a maximum of approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of
operation that are available in the Uconnect
system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object.
However, when the system is operating in Rear
Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in
the appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. If the turn signal is then activated,
and it corresponds to an alert present on that side
of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be
sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert, the radio (if
on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/
hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state
always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be
no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or
RCP systems.
WARNING!
RCP is not a backup aid system. It is intended to
be used to help a driver detect an oncoming
vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be
careful when backing up, even when using RCP.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 SAFETY
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
vehicle is started the previously stored mode will
be recalled and used.
Blind Spot Monitoring Fault Warnings
Blinded Sensor
In the case of a blinded sensor:
BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on contin-
uously.
An instrument cluster message will display
“Blind Spot Monitoring Unavailable - Wipe Rear
Bumper Corners.”
NOTE:
The rear fascia/bumper must be clean and free of
any obstructing debris.
System Not Available
In the case of the system being temporarily
unavailable:
BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on contin-
uously.
An instrument cluster message will display
“Blind Spot Monitoring Temporarily Unavail-
able.”
In the case of the system being completely
unavailable:
A chime will turn on.
An instrument cluster message will display
“Blind Spot Monitoring Unavailable - Service
Required.”
NOTE:
The vehicle must be taken to the nearest autho-
rized dealer for service.
FULL BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM WITH
M
ITIGATION
The Full Brake Control system with Mitigation
provides the driver with audible warnings (through
the radio), visual warnings (within the instrument
cluster display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn
the driver when it detects a potential frontal
collision. The warnings and limited braking are
intended to provide the driver with enough time to
react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
The Full Brake Control system monitors the
information from the forward looking sensors as
well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to
calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward
collision is probable, the driver will be provided
with audible and visual warnings and may
provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon
these progressive warnings, then the system
will provide a limited level of active braking to
help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-
ings by braking and the system determines that
the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake
force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required.
After the end of the intervention of automatic
braking, the transmission may remain in last gear
stored; therefore the car could lurch forward, once
the brakes release a few seconds later. If the Full
Brake Control system event stops the vehicle
completely, the system will hold the vehicle at
standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes.
If a Full Brake Control system event begins at a
speed below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system may
provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate
the potential forward collision. If the Full Brake
Control system event stops the vehicle completely,
the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two
seconds and then release the brakes.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
SAFETY 183
Full Brake Control System Message
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated Ú page 297.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for Full Brake Control
system activation is 3 mph (5 km/h).
The Full Brake Control system alerts may be trig-
gered on objects other than vehicles such as
guardrails or sign posts based on the course
prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal Full Brake Control system activation and
functionality.
The Full Brake Control system is intended for
on-road use only. If the vehicle is taken off-road,
the Full Brake Control system should be deacti-
vated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
Turning Full Brake Control System On Or
Off
The Full Brake Control system menu setting is
located in the Uconnect Settings Ú page 123.
NOTE:
The default status of Full Brake Control system is
“Warning + Active Braking.” This allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you and enable the active braking.
Changing the Full Brake Control system status
to “Off” deactivates the system, so no warning
or active braking will be available in case of a
possible collision.
Changing the Full Brake Control system status
to “Only Warning” prevents the system from
providing limited active braking, or additional
brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision, but maintains the audible and visual
warnings.
Changing the status of the system is possible when
the vehicle is stopped or moving.
NOTE:
The Full Brake Control system state is kept in
memory from one key cycle to the next. It will
remain the same when the vehicle is turned off
and is restarted.
Changing Full Brake Control System
Sensitivity
By changing the settings on the menu of the
Uconnect system, you can change the sensitivity of
the system by choosing one of the following three
options: "Near", "Medium" or "Far" Ú page 123.
The default option is "Medium". This setting
provides that the system notify the driver of a
possible accident with the vehicle ahead of it when
the latter is at a standard distance, intermediate
between the other two possible settings.
By setting the sensitivity of the system to "Far", the
system will warn the driver of a possible accident
with the vehicle in front when the latter is at a
greater distance, giving you the chance to act on
the brakes in a more limited and gradual way. This
setting gives the driver the maximum possible time
of reaction to prevent a possible accident.
WARNING!
The Full Brake Control System is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can the Full
Brake Control System detect every type of
potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling
the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to
follow this warning could lead to serious injury or
death.
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 SAFETY
By changing the option to "Near", the system will
warn the driver of a possible accident with the
vehicle ahead of it when the latter is a reduced
distance. This setting offers a reaction time to the
driver lower than the settings "Medium" and "Far",
in the case of a potential accident, which will
provide a more dynamic driving experience.
The setting of the sensitivity of the system is
maintained in memory when the engine is
switched off.
Full Brake Control System Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “Brake
Control Limited Functionality” or “Brake Control
Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
Full Brake Control system functionality. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, the active braking may not be fully
available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the
system will return to its full performance state. If
the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Service Full Brake Control System Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
display displays “Service Brake Control”.
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
“Brake Control Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” Warning
The “Brake Control Front Radar Sensor
Temporarily Blocked” warning will display when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions,
such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the
instrument cluster display will display “Brake
Control Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
and the system will deactivate.
The “Brake Control Front Radar Sensor
Temporarily Blocked” message can sometimes be
displayed while driving in highly reflective areas
(i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow).
The system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar
is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning
or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located
behind the lower grille. In absence of visible
obstructions on the fascia/bumper, it could be
necessary to wipe off the radar directly on the
surface, after having the radar cover removed. It’s
recommended that an authorized dealer performs
this operation.
NOTE:
If the “Brake Control Front Radar Sensor Tempo-
rarily Blocked” message occurs frequently (e.g.
more than once on every trip) without any snow,
rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor
and inhibit Full Brake Control system operation.
Precautions While Driving With Full Brake
Control System
In certain driving conditions, such as:
Driving in the vicinity of a curve
Small vehicles and/or not aligned to the lane
Lane changing of other vehicles
Passing of vehicles in an oncoming intersection
The intervention of the system could be
unexpected or delayed. The driver must therefore
always pay particular attention, while maintaining
control of the car to drive in complete safety.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
SAFETY 185
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
Entering or exiting a large curve, the system could
detect the presence of a vehicle that is in front of
the car, but that does not preside in the same lane.
In cases such as this, the system might respond.
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
The system is not able to detect the presence of
vehicles that are in front of the car but placed
outside the field of action of the radar sensor and
could therefore not react in the presence of small
vehicles such as bicycles or motorcycles.
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
Vehicles that suddenly change lanes, while
standing in the traffic lane of their car and inside
the field of action of the radar sensor may cause
the intervention of the system.
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
The system could temporarily react to a vehicle
that crossed the range of the radar sensor, in an
oncoming intersection.
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
vehicle recommended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (6.5° C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 SAFETY
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven, this is normal and there should be
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
See Ú page 269 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle's tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure
warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects, or natural pressure loss
through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold tire pressure on the
placard. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light)
illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
to turn off. The system will automatically update
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) tire pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the
ambient temperature is 68° F (20° C) and the
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20° F (-7° C) will decrease
the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi
(159 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low
enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may
cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will still be on. In this
situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire
pressure value Ú page 297.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warnings have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesir-
able system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor
damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom-
mended that you take your vehicle to an
authorized dealership to have your sensor
function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System sensor.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
SAFETY 187
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, or to provide warning of
a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu-
rate tire gauge, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
tire pressure in the tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS Warning Light located in
the instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel
as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module.
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM LOW
PRESSURE WARNINGS
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will illuminate in the instrument cluster, an
acoustic signal will be activated, and the “Check
left or right front/rear tire” text message will
display when one or more of the four active road
tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and
inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value. The system will
automatically update and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Warning Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
CHECK TPMS WARNINGS
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on
solid when a system fault is detected, an audible
chime will be activated and the “Service Tire
Pressure Monitoring System” text message will
display. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will
repeat providing the system fault still exists. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur with any of the following
scenarios:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
ings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact
spare wheel and tire assembly.
The compact spare tire does not have a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System sensor. Therefore,
the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in
the compact spare tire.
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 SAFETY
If you install the compact spare tire in place of a
road tire that has a pressure below the low-pres-
sure warning limit, upon the next ignition cycle,
a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System Warning Light will still turn on due
to the low tire.
However, after driving the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid.
This occurs for each subsequent ignition cycle,
a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
compact spare tire, the TPMS will update auto-
matically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will turn off, as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passengers
as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
position Ú page 204.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 204.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow the
front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
into the space between occupants and the
door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see Ú page 294 for customer service contact
information.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
SAFETY 189
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be
a poor driver and could cause a collision that
includes you. This can happen far away from home
or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active
whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/
RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard
front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you
can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position to minimize
the risk of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
WARNING!
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
SAFETY 191
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
WARNING!
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
collision, or if you have questions regarding
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
WARNING!
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 SAFETY
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt away
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or
down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage Up
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted
in the upward position without pushing or
squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
SAFETY 193
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
an accident is reduced for the mother and the
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a
collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 SAFETY
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
restraint system Ú page 211.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for
each seating position.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped with
an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the
seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
restraint is installed in a seating position that has
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
that have a harness for restraining the child.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
SAFETY 195
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the AVV/START or
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If
the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
tion switch is first in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN
position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In
this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 SAFETY
(Continued)
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until
the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been
detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately Ú page 69.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deployment.
A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
severe collisions.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-
ably extending your arms to reach the steering
wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
SAFETY 197
(Continued)
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger seat
belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may
adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front
Air Bags based upon seat position.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of whether
or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupants Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate
and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
of the driver and front passenger, and position the
front occupants for improved interaction with the
front air bags.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air
bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
though you have air bags.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc.
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 SAFETY
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
The SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
the space between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
high force that it could injure occupants if they are
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing
serious injury.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
SAFETY 199
(Continued)
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response
to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should
remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after-
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add
roof racks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 SAFETY
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat
belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy
the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain rollover or side impact
events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
priate) are necessary for your protection in all
collisions. They also help keep you in position,
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
pants must wear their seat belts properly and
sit upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a child
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
WARNING!
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
SAFETY 201
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent
and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or
if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme-
diately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
by-product of the process that generates the
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System perform the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes
from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any
of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump (if equipped)
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat
belt retractor assemblies replaced by an
authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 SAFETY
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
the engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine. If
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the system by following the
procedure described below. If you have any doubt,
contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is active,
a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn
the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and
right turn signal lights, located in the instrument
panel, may both be blinking and will continue to
blink. In order to move your vehicle to the side of
the road, you must follow the system reset
procedure.
Customer Action Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
6. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
SAFETY 203
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to
be successful.
7. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
8. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.
12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be completed
within one minute or sequence will need to be repeated).
System is now reset and the engine may be started.
Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).
Customer Action Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 SAFETY
Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such
data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
ating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
aftermarket side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag
system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally
or may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat,
including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may
be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
SAFETY 205
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call
1-888-327-4236.
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html.
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
have not reached the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster
seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 SAFETY
(Continued)
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height limit of the
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
SAFETY 207
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
their back is against the seatback, should use the
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child is
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no”,
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
which may result in serious injury or death. A
child must always wear both the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
SAFETY 209
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of
the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat
belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH anchorage system
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage
system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat
owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating positions?
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the
center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages
in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if
the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in each seating position if
they interfere with the installation of the child restraint
Ú page 30.
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Lower Anchorage Location
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located on the back of the seat.
Tether Anchorage Locations
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH:
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described here.
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This position
is not approved for installing child seats using
the LATCH attachments. You must use the
seat belt and tether anchor to install a child
seat in the center seating position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. See
Ú page 211 for typical installation instruc-
tions.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
SAFETY 211
(Continued)
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 211 to check what type of seat belt each
seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect
it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 213 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 SAFETY
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
portion of the seat belt tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 194 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
WARNING!
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach
a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a
forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight
limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint
is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in each seating position if
they interfere with the installation of the child restraint
Ú page 30.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against
the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
SAFETY 213
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
allow the webbing to retract back into the
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat
step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 213 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
that seating position, located behind the top of
the vehicle seat. See Ú page 208 for the
location of approved tether anchorages in your
vehicle.
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 SAFETY
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. If the seat can be moved,
you may need to move the seat forward to
provide better access to the tether
anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage
for that seating position, move the child
restraint to another position in the vehicle if
one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower
the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
in the diagram.
Tether Anchorage Locations
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
SAFETY 215
(Continued)
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is first placed in
the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the
bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 188.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the
windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO
NOT install your floor mat upside down
or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER
install or stack an additional floor mat
on top of an existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced,
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the
specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
lug nuts/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should
be located and corrected immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-
ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the
engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the
brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to
check for interference. If your floor mat inter-
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING!
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
each pedal to check for interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
SAFETY 217
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an
authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in
a parked vehicle with the engine running for
an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in
an open area with the engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the
vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
6
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218
(Continued)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on
the switch bank below the radio.
Hazard Warning Flasher Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use only
when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in OFF mode.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers
may wear down your battery.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take
it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING!
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 219
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn the ignition to STOP mode.
6. Block both the front and rear wheel diagonally
opposite of each jacking position. For example,
if the driver’s front wheel is being changed,
block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheels Chocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being raised or lifted.
JACK LOCATION/SPARE TIRE
S
TOWAGE — IF EQUIPPED
The jack and tools are located in the rear storage
compartment, under the load floor.
Jack And Tools Location
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor
handle.
Load Floor Handle
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
Spare Tire Fastener
7
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
4. Remove the jack, wheel bolt wrench, and
wheel chocks (if equipped).
Jack And Tools
5. Remove the spare tire.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
1 — Wheel Bolt Wrench
2 — Jack
3 — Emergency Funnel
4 — Wheel Chock (If Equipped)
5 — Screwdriver
6 — Emergency Allen Key
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake and place an auto-
matic transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite of the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
the valve stem facing the ground.
WARNING!
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 221
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt
wrench.
2. If equipped with wheels where the center cap
covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt
wrench to pry the center cap off carefully
before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt
wrench to loosen, but not remove, the wheel
bolts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the
wheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while
the wheel is still on the ground.
Loosen The Wheel Bolt
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations
are critical. See below images for proper jacking
locations.
Front And Rear Jacking Locations
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is
closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw
clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with
the lift area of the sill flange, centering the jack
saddle inside the cutout in the sill cladding.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
7
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the
flat tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install
a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare
Ú page 280.
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of
the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten
the wheel bolts.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the
wheel bolt wrench counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down
on the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts
in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been
tightened twice Ú page 289.
11. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks and flat
tire.
12. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt to
ensure that all wheel bolts are properly seated
against the wheel. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service
station.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 223
SEMI–AUTO KIT
DESCRIPTION
If a tire is punctured, you can make an emergency
repair using the Semi-Auto Kit located in the trunk
beneath the load floor.
Semi-Auto Kit Location
The Semi-Auto Kit includes:
Power Cord.
Sealant cartridge containing the sealing fluid.
Filler tube.
Adhesive label with the writing "Max. 50 mph
(80 km/h)”, to be attached in a position easily
visible to the driver (e.g. on the dashboard) after
repairing the tire.
Air compressor, complete with pressure gauge
and connectors.
An instruction pamphlet for reference in prompt
and correct use of the Semi-Auto Kit, which
must be then given to the personnel dealing
with the sealant-treated tire.
A pair of protective gloves.
Adapters for inflating different elements.
Semi-Auto Kit Components
NOTE:
The sealant is effective with external temperatures
of between -40°F (-40°C) and 122°F (50°C). The
sealant has an expiration date.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
1 — Power Cord
2 — Adhesive Label
3 — Sealant Cartridge
4 — Filler Tube
5 — Air Compressor
7
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
(Continued)
To use the Semi-Auto Kit, proceed as follows:
1. Stop the vehicle in a position where you can
repair the tire safely. You should be as far as
possible from the side of the road, and in a
position that is not dangerous for oncoming
traffic. Activate the Hazard Warning Flashers,
remove the safety triangle from the trunk, and
place it at a suitable distance from the vehicle
to make other drivers aware of your presence.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to
the ground. This will allow the Semi-Auto Kit
hoses to reach the valve stem and keep the
tire repair kit flat on the ground.
3. Place the gear selector to PARK (P).
4. Apply the Electric Park Brake and cycle the
engine OFF.
INFLATION PROCEDURE
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
using the Semi-Auto Kit.
Do not use the Semi-Auto Kit or drive the
vehicle under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approxi-
mately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving on
a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep the Semi-Auto Kit away from open
flames or heat sources.
A loose Semi-Auto Kit thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could endanger the occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always stow the
Semi-Auto Kit in the place provided. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passen-
gers, and others around you.
WARNING!
Take care not to allow the contents of the
Semi-Auto Kit to come in contact with hair,
eyes, or clothing. Semi-Auto Kit sealant is
harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with
plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes
or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible,
if there is any contact with clothing.
Semi-Auto Kit sealant solution contains latex.
In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult
a physician immediately. Keep the Semi-Auto
Kit out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse
mouth immediately with plenty of water and
drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting!
Consult a physician immediately.
WARNING!
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 225
To use your Semi-Auto Kit, proceed as follows:
1. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
2. Insert the sealant cartridge containing the
sealing fluid in the proper compressor holder,
pushing down hard. Unscrew the tire valve
cap, take out the filler tube and tighten the
fitting on the tire valve.
Attaching Filler Tube To Deflated Tire
3. Make sure the power switch of the compressor
is in the O (off) position.
4. Insert the plug into the vehicle’s power outlet,
then start the engine.
12 Volt Power Outlet
5. Start the compressor by placing the power
switch in the I (on) position.
6. Inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the
tire placard, located on the driver’s side
B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door Ú page 273. In order to obtain a more
precise reading, check the pressure value on
pressure gauge with the compressor off.
Air Compressor
7. If the pressure is not at least 26.1 psi (1.8 bar)
after 15 minutes, disengage the compressor
from the valve and power outlet. Then, move
the vehicle forwards approximately five tire
turns in order to distribute the sealant inside
the tire evenly, and then repeat the inflation
operation.
8. If you still cannot obtain a pressure of at least
26 psi (1.8 bar) within 15 minutes of turning
the compressor on, do not drive the vehicle,
and contact an authorized dealer.
9. Drive the vehicle for about 5 miles (8 km),
stop, apply the electric park brake, and
recheck the tire pressure.
1 — Sealant Cartridge
2 — Filler Tube
5 — Pressure Gauge
6 — Power Switch
7
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
10. If the pressure is less than 26 psi (1.8 bar), DO
NOT drive the vehicle, and see an authorized
dealer.
11. If a pressure value of at least 26 psi (1.8 bar)
is detected, restore the correct pressure (with
engine running and electric park brake
applied), and drive immediately with great care
to an authorized dealer.
12. Apply the adhesive label from the sealant
bottle where it can be easily seen by the driver
as a reminder that the tire has been treated
with a Semi-Auto Kit, as well as not to exceed
the speed restriction for the treated tire.
SEALANT CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
Only use original cartridges, which can be
purchased at an authorized dealer.
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the sealant cartridge by pushing the
release button located on the side of the
compressor.
2. Insert the new sealant cartridge by pushing
downward firmly.
Sealant Cartridge Replacement
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
The Semi-Auto Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced after using the Semi-Auto Kit. Do not
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is
repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around
you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible
at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker to
the padded area on the steering wheel. Adhering
the speed restriction sticker to the padded area
on the steering wheel is dangerous because the
air bag may not operate (deploy) normally
resulting in serious injury. In addition, do not
adhere the sticker to areas where warning lights
or the speedometer cannot be viewed.
1 — Sealant Cartridge
9 — Release Button
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 227
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of
the engine compartment, behind the left headlight
assembly.
Positive (+) Battery Post
NOTE:
The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to
the positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses.
Only jump directly off positive post which has a
positive
(+) symbol on or around the post.
Follow the below steps to prepare for jump
starting:
1. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
2. Pull upward and remove the protective cover
over the remote positive
(+) battery post.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
starter motor, alternator or electrical system may
occur.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
7
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive
(+)
post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive
(+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground
must be away from the battery and the fuel
injection system.
Jump Starting Label
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon-
necting procedure below.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the jumper
cable from the engine ground of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive
(+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable from the positive
(+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery, and
reinstall the protective cap.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging
system inspected at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 229
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for
a Cap-Less Fuel System. It is located under the
load floor of the rear storage compartment. If
refueling is necessary, while using an approved
gas can, insert the refueling funnel into the filler
neck opening. Take care to open both flappers with
the funnel to avoid spills.
Fuel Funnel Location
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on
the fuel door to break the ice buildup and
re-release the fuel door by pulling the fuel door tab
outwards.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A
funnel is provided to allow emergency refueling
with a gas can.
See below steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as
the fuel nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper
doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior
to putting back in the spare tire storage area.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce
the potential for overheating your engine by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle
speed.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
7
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
system and turning the A/C off can help remove
this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can
use the following procedure to temporarily move
the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
3. Locate the bezel and boot assembly.
Gear Selector Bezel Location
4. Carefully separate the gear selector bezel and
boot assembly from the center console.
Removing Gear Selector Bezel
5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on the “H” and you hear
continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 231
6. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down
into the gear selector override access hole (at
the right front corner of the gear selector
assembly), and push and hold the override
release lever down.
Gear Selector Override Location
7. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL
position.
8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
9. Reinstall the gear selector bezel.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift
back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE
(R), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning
the wheels or racing the engine.
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
less. Whenever the transmission remains in
NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, you must
press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or
REVERSE.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF”
mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 176.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF
button again to restore “ESC On” mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or
transmission failure during prolonged efforts
to free a stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE/SECOND gear and REVERSE,
do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph
(24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
fast may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not
spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
while in gear (no transmission shifting occur-
ring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 sec-
onds continuously without stopping when you
are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
7
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
(Continued)
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
service.
This vehicle must be towed with all four wheels
OFF
the ground.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the RUN position.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery
is discharged, find Instructions on shifting the
transmission out of PARK in order to move the
vehicle Ú page 230.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) MODELS
FCA US LLC requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
the vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of the
vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing
dolly.
TOW EYE USAGE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a tow eye that can be
used to move a disabled vehicle.
When using a tow eye, be sure to follow the Tow
Eye Usage Precautions below.
Tow Eye
Tow Eye Usage Precautions
Towing
Condition
Wheels OFF
The Ground
ALL WHEEL
DRIVE
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or
Dolly Tow
Rear
NOT ALLOWED
Front NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL OK
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may
result from improper towing.
CAUTION!
DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels
on the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will
result.
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or power
transfer unit will occur if a front or rear wheel
lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The tow eye must only be used for roadside
emergencies. Use with an appropriate device
in accordance with highway code (a rigid bar
or rope) to maneuver the vehicle in prepara-
tion for transport via a tow truck.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 233
(Continued)
Tow Eye Warning Label
Front Tow Eye Installation
The front tow eye receptacle is located behind an
access door, located on the right side of the front
fascia/bumper. To install the tow eye, open the
access door using the vehicle key or a small
screwdriver, and thread the tow eye into the
receptacle.
Insert the wheel bolt wrench handle through the
eye and tighten. The tow eye must be fully seated
to the attaching bracket through the lower front
fascia/bumper as shown. If the tow eye is not fully
seated to the attaching bracket, the vehicle should
not be towed.
Front Tow Eye Access Door
Front Tow Eye Installed
The tow eye must not be used to move the
vehicle off the road or where there are obsta-
cles.
Do not use the tow eyes for tow truck hookup
or highway towing.
Do not use the tow eye to free a stuck vehicle
Ú page 231.
Damage to your vehicle may occur if these
guidelines are not followed Ú page 232.
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
eyes.
CAUTION!
Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains may
break, causing serious injury or death.
Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow
straps may break or become disengaged,
causing serious injury or death.
Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may
cause components to break resulting in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
7
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Tow Eye Installation
The rear tow eye receptacle is located behind a
access door on the rear fascia/bumper.
To install the tow eye, open the access door using
the vehicle key or a small screwdriver, and thread
the tow eye into the receptacle.
Insert the wheel bolt wrench handle through the
eye and tighten. The tow eye must be fully seated
to the attaching bracket through the lower rear
fascia/bumper. If the tow eye is not fully seated to
the attaching bracket, the vehicle should not be
towed.
Rear Tow Eye Access Door
Rear Tow Eye Installed
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 201.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle Ú page 204.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
235
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate in the
instrument cluster. This means that service is
required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow and
extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
NOTE:
The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate under
these conditions.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
unusual wear or damage.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
and brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill as
needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Check and adjust hand brake.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 237
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if
necessary, check Tire Service Kit expiration date (if
provided).
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction
indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage compartment,
passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument
panel warning lights, etc.).
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (brakes/
hydraulic clutch, windshield washer, engine coolant, etc.).
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool). • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork, underbody
protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes),
rubber elements (boots, sleeves, bushings, etc.).
• • • • • • • •
Check windshield/rear window wiper blade position/wear. • • • • • • • •
Check operation of windshield washer system and adjust
jets if necessary.
• • • • • • • •
Check cleanliness of hood and tailgate locks and
cleanliness and lubrication of linkages.
• • • • • • •
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Visually check the condition and wear of the front and rear
brakes.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Check the front suspension, tie rods and replace if
necessary.
• • • • • • •
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Visual inspect the condition of the accessory drive belt. •
Check the tension of the accessory drive belt. • •
Inspect and replace, if required, front end accessory drive
belt, tensioner, and, idler pulley.
• •
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. •
Change engine oil and replace oil filter.
1
In accordance with Oil Change Indicator System OR Severe Duty Mileage, whichever occurs first.
Inspect the PTU fluid level. • • •
Inspect the rear differential fluid level. • • •
Replace spark plugs.
2
• • •
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
3
• • • • • • •
Replace brake fluid every two years. • • • • • • •
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 239
Replace cabin filter. To be replaced every 12,000 mi (19,000 km).
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
• •
1. The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out when indicated by a warning light or message on the instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed 1 year or 10,000 miles
(16,000 km).
2. The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly intervals do not apply. The following are essential to ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine:
Only use spark plugs of the same make and type which are specially certified for such engines
Ú page 293.
Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement interval given in the Maintenance Plan for spark plug replacement.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have any questions.
3. The engine air cleaner filter should be inspected at every oil change if used in dusty areas.
○ Recommend replacement
• Mandatory service
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1.3L TURBO ENGINE
1 — Oil Fill Cap/Engine Oil Dipstick 5 —Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter (Located Under Engine Cover) 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Battery 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 241
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine
is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
NOTE:
The dipstick is integral with the cap.
Engine Oil Cap/Dipstick Installation
Install the oil cap/dipstick aligning arrow on the
cap with arrow on the engine cover and then screw
the cap down.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the
MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at
the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil
level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in
the engine compartment, and the fluid level should
be checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent (not engine
coolant/ antifreeze) Ú page 240.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, and
periodic maintenance is not required.
1 — Oil Cap/Dipstick Arrow
2 — Engine Cover Arrow
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could
damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water Ú page 226.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do
not allow cable clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
hands after handling.
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For the proper engine oil selection Ú page 293.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API
trademark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40
and 5W-40 engine oil.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243
(Continued)
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
the addition of any additives (other than leak
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
problem to the environment. Contact an
authorized dealer, service station or governmental
agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
certified filters should be used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 236.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified
filters should be used.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from
rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a
reason to replace belt. However, cracks running
along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt
with cracks running along a rib must be replaced.
Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear,
frayed cords or severe glazing.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive
belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could be
injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equip-
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
WARNING!
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated
from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two
ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem
before new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble
is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This
service should include cleaning of the condenser
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using recovery
and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
See an authorized dealer for service.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
Information Book, located in your owner’s
information kit, for further warranty informa-
tion.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
to be disconnected should be done by an
experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
a lithium based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper
function. When performing other underhood
services, the hood latch, release mechanism and
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine
oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chat-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of
these conditions are present, clean the wiper
blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace
the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do
not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is
damaged.
Service Position Strategy
The service position allows the wiper blades to be
placed in a position that allows the wiper blades to
be easily changed.
To enable the Service Position Strategy, the wipers
must be in the Park position before placing the
ignition in the OFF position.
Service Mode must be activated within two
minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
To have a correct activation of strategy, the Service
Position command (anti-panic) must be active for
at least half a second.
At every valid activation of Service Position
command, the wiper blades are activated for
250 ms.
The Service Position command can be repeated
several times to bring the blades into the desired
position, up to a maximum of three times.
After three subsequent activations the strategy is
disabled.
Function Deactivation:
The functionality is reset if:
The ignition is turned to the RUN position.
Number of subsequent activations is three.
Two minute timer has expired after placing the
ignition OFF.
NOTE:
When turning the ignition ON, the blades will go
into the parking position.
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the
wiper blade off of the windshield.
2. Push the release button on the arm of the
wiper blade.
3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it.
4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Carefully lift the rear wiper arm upward to
raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass.
2. Grab and hold the wiper arm closest to the
wiper blade end while pushing the wiper blade
towards the liftgate glass to unsnap the blade
pivot pin from the wiper blade holder on the
wiper arm.
3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper
blade holder at the end of the wiper arm, and
firmly push the wiper blade until it snaps into
place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
technician inspect the complete exhaust system
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Button
3 — Wiper Arm
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
scious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing CO Ú page 216.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such mate-
rials might be grass or leaves coming into
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park
or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can
burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
emissions control device and may seriously
reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor
may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
nents disconnected or removed, such as when
diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods
during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
ating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is
dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C
condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO
NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction
could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter
and vehicle.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radi-
ator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may
start at any time, whether the engine is
running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
tion to the OFF position. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at any time the
ignition is in the ON position.
WARNING!
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system
please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 236.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 293.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant, may result in engine damage
and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT
engine coolant is different and should not be
mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is
introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement.
To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the
area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
(Continued)
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system, please contact a local authorized
dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain,
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that
engine coolant will return to the radiator from the
coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank (if
equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is any accumulation of foreign material on the
sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the
disposal rules for your community. To prevent
ingestion by animals or children, do not store
ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers
or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground,
clean up any ground spills immediately. If ingested
by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
visual method for determining that the coolant
level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the
level of the coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should
be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines marked on
the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant
bottle. Do not overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
meters of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment.
This is normally a result of moisture from rain,
snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of the
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
WARNING!
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure
tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro-
sion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all
brake system components should be inspected
periodically Ú page 236.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be
checked when performing under hood services, or
immediately if the “Brake Warning Light” is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to
bring the fluid level up to the requirements
described on the brake fluid reservoir. Fluid level
can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. The
brake fluid level should be checked when the pads
are replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid
Ú page 293.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
would not have your full braking capacity in an
emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid Ú page 293. Using the wrong type of
brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at
all times. Brake fluid in a open container
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This
could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
contact with these surfaces.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
using any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required, therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use the manufacturer specified transmission
fluid Ú page 293. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contam-
inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
could be damaged, causing partial or
complete brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake
fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in
loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the
transmission.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage your
transmission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder Ú page 293.
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the
electrical circuit inside the fuse for a break/melt.
Also please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Fuse Removal
To replace a fuse use the extractor attached to the
fuse cover (located on the inside of the engine
compartment fuse cover.)
Fuse Extractor Location
Access To The Fuses
The fuses are grouped into four controllers located
in the engine compartment, under the instrument
panel and on the inside of the left side cargo trim
panel.
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution
Unit
The engine compartment fuse panel is part of the
Body Control Module (BCM), located on the left
side of the engine compartment.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for BCM fuse
replacement.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or
any other material. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire and/
or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, gearbox system),
steering system or Body Control Module
(BCM) blows, contact an authorized dealer.
1 — Electrical Circuit
2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit
3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit
WARNING!
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
Engine Compartment Fuse Location
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fuse Panel And Cover Removal
Removing Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
1. Slowly turn the screw counterclockwise.
2. Slowly release the screw.
3. Remove the fuse cover by sliding it upward.
Mounting Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
1. Properly secure the fuse cover to the box,
slide completely from top to bottom.
2. Fully press the screw, using the special
screwdriver supplied.
3. Slowly turn the screw clockwise.
4. Release the screw.
Battery Fuse Cover Location
1 — Mounting Screw
2 — Fuse Cover
1 — Fuse Cover Tabs
2 — Fuse Cover
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
If Equipped *
F01 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Computer
F02 60 Amp Blue – – Module Body Computer, Rear Distribution Units
F03 – 20 Amp Blue – Controller Power Supply Body Computer
F04 – 30 Amp Pink – Brake Control Electronics Module
F05 70 Amp Tan – – Electric Power-Assisted Steering
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 255
F06 70 Amp Tan – – Engine Cooling fan
F08 – 30 Amp Pink – Automatic Transmission, GSM
F09 – – 5 Amp Tan Control Module Engine
F10 – – 10 Amp Red Horn
F11 – – 5 Amp Tan Supply Secondary Loads
F14 – – 7.5 Amp Brown WCAC Supply Pump
F15 40 Amp Orange – – Brake Control Module Pump
F16 – – 5 Amp Tan Engine Control Module Power, Automatic Transmission
F17 – – 30 Amp Green Power Control Module Engine
F18 – – 30 Amp Green Power All-Wheel Drive
F19 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioner Compressor
F20 – – 5 Amp Tan Electronic Power Four-Wheel Drive
F21 – – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – – 10 Amp Red Supply Primary Loads
F23 – –
20 Amp Yellow
(Customer Installed)
Power Outlet (Battery Powered)
F24 – – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Unit Supply Automatic Transmission
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
If Equipped *
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F30 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Windshield *
F82 – 20 Amp Blue – Control Module Engine
F83 – 40 Amp Green – Air Conditioning Fan
F84 – – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Ignition Powered)
F87 – – 5 Amp Tan Gear Selector Automatic Transmission
F88 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Outside Mirrors
F89 – 30 Amp Pink – Heated Rear Window
F90 – – 5 Amp Tan IBS Sensor (Battery State of Charge)
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
If Equipped *
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 257
Body Computer Fuse Center
The controller is located at the left side of the steering column at the bottom of the instrument panel.
For the fuse replacement see an authorized dealer.
Body Controller Fuse Cavities
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F31 7.5 Amp Brown Fan Air Conditioning, Power Socket
F33 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Passenger Side)
F34 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Driver’s Side)
F36 15 Amp Blue Supply Uconnect System, Air Conditioning, USB Port, Rear lateral ceiling light in case of open roof, EOBD port
F37 10 Amp Red
System Power Forward Collision Warning Plus, All-Wheel Drive (AWD), IPC, Central stack switches, Brake Pedal
Switch (NC)
F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Locking
F42 7.5 Amp Brown BSM - Brake Control Module, EPS - Electric Power-Assisted Steering
F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-directional Pump Washer
F47 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Driver Side)
F48 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Passenger Side)
F49 7.5 Amp Brown
Supply ParkSense, Spot Lights Front Dome, Internal Electrochromic Mirror, Heated Front Seats, SGW, Sunroof
Motor.
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Supply Air Bag
F51 7.5 Amp Brown
Air Conditioning Compressor, Plaque Automatic Transmission, Rear Camera, Air Conditioning, LDW - Lane
Departure Warning, ASS - Auxiliary Stack Switch, DSU - Drive Selector Unit, Reverse gear switch, side mirrors
and rear window defrost
F53 7.5 Amp Brown
Supply IPC/Starter Device/System Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ , Brake Pedal Switch (NA), EPB - Electric Parking
Brake
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit
To access the fuses, remove the access door from
the left rear panel of the rear cargo area. Push on the
left side of the access door to unhinge and remove.
Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities
BULB REPLACEMENT
General Information
Before you replace a bulb, check the contacts to
be sure they are not oxidized.
Replace the bulbs with the same type and
wattage.
After replacing a light bulb, always check the
correct orientation.
Before replacing a bulb that is not functioning,
check that the fuse is intact.
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to
change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will
usually accelerate the clearing process.
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part
Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this
section includes bulb description and replacement
part numbers. All of the inside bulbs are brass or
glass-wedge base. Aluminum base bulbs are not
approved.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb
replacement.
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F2
20 Amp
Yellow
Audio System
F3
20 Amp
Yellow
Electric Sunroof
F5
30 Amp
Green
Power Seat (driver side)
F6
7.5 Amp
Brown
Power Seat (driver side)
Lumbar Adjustment
F8
20 Amp
Yellow
Heating Front Seats
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Interior Lamps
Lamp Name Lamp Number
Front Courtesy Light C5W
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) C5W
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable Roof) C5W
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable Roof) C5W
Interior Lights W5W
Dome Light (Glove Compartment) W5W
Exterior Lamps
Lamp Name Lamp Number
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps HIR2
Optional Low Beam/High Bean Headlamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Direction Indicator Lamps WY21W
Fog Lamps (Halogen) H11
Fog Lamps (LED) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Side Indicators (Side View Mirror) WY5W
Side Marker LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Tail/Brake lights LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Turn Indicators WY21W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps
Front Lamps
Hi/Lo Beam Light Halogen
See below steps for bulb replacement:
1. Open the engine compartment and remove
the headlamp bulb cap.
Headlamp Bulb Cap
2. Rotate the headlamp bulb socket counter-
clockwise then pull outwards.
Headlamp Bulb Socket
Reverse P21W
License Plate Lamp W5W
Exterior Lamps
Lamp Name Lamp Number
1 — Headlamps
2 — Daytime Running Lamps
3 — Directional Indicators
4 — Fog Lamps — If Equipped
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Release the locking tab on the headlamp bulb
connector and remove the bulb and socket.
Headlamp Bulb Connector
4. Install the new headlamp bulb making sure it
is properly locked.
5. Install the headlamp bulb and socket; align the
tabs and turn it clockwise making sure it is
properly locked.
Headlamp Bulb Connector
LED Main Beam/Dipped Beam Headlights/Fog
Lights — If Equipped
For replacing these bulbs, contact an authorized
dealership.
Side Lights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
The side lights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) are
LED-type. To replace them, contact an authorized
dealership.
Side Marker
Side marker lights are LED-type. For replacing
these bulbs, contact an authorized dealer
Front Direction Indicator Lamp
See below steps for bulb replacement:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Use a suitable tool to remove the access door.
Light Access
3. Turn the bulb and bulb holder assembly
counterclockwise and then remove it sliding it
outwards.
WARNING!
Carry out the operation of replacing lamps only
with the engine off. Also make sure that the
engine is cold, to avoid the danger of burns.
1 — Screws
2 — Access Door
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
4. Replace the bayonet-fitted bulb.
Bulb Assembly
5. Finally, refit the inspection door, fully
tightening fixing screws.
Fog Lights (Halogen)
See below steps for bulb replacement:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Use a suitable tool to remove the access door.
Fog Light Access
3. Turn the bulb and bulb holder assembly
counterclockwise and then remove it sliding it
outwards.
Fog Lamp Bulb Location
4. Replace the bayonet-fitted bulb.
Bulb Assembly
5. Finally, refit the inspection door, fully
tightening fixing screws.
Side Indicators on External Rear View Mirrors –
If Equipped
1 — Bulb Holder
2 — Bulb
1 — Screws
2 — Access Door
1 — Bulb Holder
2 — Bulb
CAUTION!
The procedure is described as a guideline. For
the replacement of the lamp it is recommended
that you contact an authorized dealer.
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
See below steps for bulb replacement:
1. Remove the mirror cap on the outside rear
view mirror.
Mirror Cap
2. Remove the transparent lens assembly as
shown.
3. Remove the bulb socket and bulb from the
transparent lens assembly by rotating the
socket counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket by
pulling the bulb straight out.
5. Insert the new bulb, making sure that it is
locked into place
6. Reinstall the socket in to the transparent lens
assembly.
7. Reinstall the cover on the outside rear view
mirror, making sure it is locked into place.
Rear Tail Lamps
Tail Light
Tail Lamps
The tail lights are LED-type. For replacing these
bulbs, contact an authorized dealership.
Brake Lights
The brake lights are LED-type. For replacing these
bulbs, contact an authorized dealership.
Side Marker
Side marker lights are LED-type. For replacing
these bulbs, contact an authorized dealer
3th Stop Lamp
The CHMSL is LED. For their replacement see an
authorized dealer.
1 — Mirror Cover
2 — Side Indicator Lens
3 — Side Indicator Bulb Location
1 — Tail lights/Brake Lights
2 — Direction indicator
3 — REVERSE lights
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
Reversing Light & Rear Direction Indicators
See below steps for bulb replacement:
1. Open liftgate
2. Using a suitable tool, undo the two inboard
screws, then release the light cluster from the
respective pin fasteners pulling it carefully.
Tail Light Screws
3. Disconnect the connector, then undo the two
screws to access the bulbs.
Tail Light Access
4. Locate faulty bulb and press slightly and turn
at the same time: counterclockwise to extract;
clockwise to install.
5. Reposition the bulb holder assembly in the
headlight body, proceed until you hear the tabs
click.
6. Reinstall tail lamp assembly and close liftgate.
License Plate Lights
See below steps for bulb replacement:
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the license plate
lens.
License Plate Light Location
License Plate Light
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Remove the bulbs from the individual side
contacts.
Lamp Assembly
3. Insert the new bulbs, and ensure that they are
properly locked between the contacts.
4. Reinstall the license plate lens.
NOTE:
If removal the license plate lens using a suitable
tool, be sure to cover the tip of the suitable with a
cloth so no damage is done to the lenses or the
vehicle paint.
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Front Courtesy Light
See below steps for bulb replacement:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the front
courtesy light as shown.
Front Courtesy Light Housing
2. Release the retainer clips and bulb housing as
shown.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
3. Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of
bulb housing.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
1 — Bulb Holder
2 — Bulb
1 — Retaining Clips
2 — Bulb Housing
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 267
4. Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they are
properly locked.
5. Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy
light housing making sure that they are
properly locked.
6. Install the front courtesy light making sure that
it is properly locked.
Dome Light Vanity Mirror
See below steps for bulb replacement:
1. Lift the cover of the mirror and pull out the
visor mirror light cover.
2. Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side
contacts, and then insert the new bulb, making
sure that it is properly locked between the
contacts.
Visor Mirror Cover
3. Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making
sure that it is properly locked.
4. Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the
mirror.
Dome Light Glove Compartment
See below steps for bulb replacement:
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Place your fingers inside the light assembly,
pull the bulb to replace it.
Bulb Removal/Installation
3. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly
locked.
1 — Visor Mirror Cover
2 — Visor Mirror Light
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Rear Dome Light — Without Retractable Roof
See below steps for bulb replacement:
1. Using a suitable tool release the lamp
assembly at both the ends.
2. Open the flap and replace the bulb.
Rear Dome Light
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the
contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
Dome Light
See below steps for bulb replacement:
1. Lower the handle in the direction shown
remove the dome light.
Retractable Roof Light
2. Replace the bulb by removing it from the side
contacts.
Bulb
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the
contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
Interior Cargo Lights
See below steps for bulb replacement:
1. Open the luggage compartment and remove
the dome light assembly.
2. Open the light cover and replace the bulb.
Light Cover
3. Close the light cover over the bulb.
4. Reinstall the dome light in its correct position.
1 — Bulb
2 — Flap
WARNING!
Before proceeding with the lamp replace-
ment, wait for the lamp to cool: DANGER OF
BURNS!
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 269
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
“S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5
R15 LT.
Modifications or repair of the electrical system
performed incorrectly and without taking into
account the technical characteristics can
cause malfunctions with the risk of fire.
Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure, in
the event of breakage be careful of the projec-
tion of fragments of glass.
Halogen lamps must be handled by touching
only the metallic part. If the transparent bulb
is in contact with the fingers, reduces the
intensity of the emitted light and you can also
affect the life of the lamp. In case of acci-
dental contact, rub the bulb with a cloth damp-
ened with alcohol and allow to dry.
WARNING!
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 271
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar
The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the
front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has
not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in
units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire
inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into
the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading
capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire
inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 273
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
Ú page 112.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading,
and trailer towing Ú page 112.
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
configurations and number and size of occu-
pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
865 lb (392 kg).
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 275
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
can cause damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change.
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure
inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will
be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat
tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is
not designed to be reused when driven under Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
Run Flat mode.
See Ú page 185.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping.
For further information Ú page 231.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires
should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the tire should be replaced.
For further information Ú page 279.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Failure to follow this warning can result in
sudden tire failure. You could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed Ú page 278. Refer to the
Tire and Loading Information placard or the
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example for more
information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire Ú page 270.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and
ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season tires.
All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads
are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for your
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-
dictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over-
loading and failure. You could lose control and
have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire
sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original
equipment tires. Use snow tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an
authorized tire dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice,
skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.
Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local
laws should be checked before using these tire
types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 117.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If
your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with a compact or limited use temporary
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/
80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before
lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not
drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary
use spares have limited tread life. When the tread
is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be
sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not
drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary
use spares have limited tread life. When the tread
is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be
sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
more than the speed listed on the limited use
spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel
cleaners and automatic car washes may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These prod-
ucts may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
or polishing compounds. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this
finish.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
Trim Level Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum
projection beyond tire profile or
equivalent)
ALL Front
215/55R17
215/60R16
7 mm Cable Chain
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as
those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 236.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe
the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension compo-
nents, it is important that only traction devices
in good condition are used. Broken devices can
cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle imme-
diately if noise occurs that could indicate
device breakage. Remove the damaged parts
of the device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed of
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the power transfer
unit. Tire rotation schedule should be followed to
balance tire wear.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following
steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
NOTE:
When the vehicle has not been started or driven for
at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure
is required to start the vehicle Ú page 80.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
make roads passable in snow and ice and those
that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec-
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from
the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace
the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and
if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision,
or if you have questions regarding seat belt or
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching
the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
the leather upholstery and should be removed
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is
designed for easy cleaning, and the manufacturer
recommends Mopar® total care leather cleaner
applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may
result.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
289
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is stamped on the plate illustrated, located
on the left front corner of the instrument panel
cover, visible from outside the vehicle through the
windshield.
Windshield VIN Location
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose
normal capability, the remaining system will still
function. However, there will be some loss of
overall braking effectiveness. You may notice
increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF)
the brakes will still function. However, the effort
required to brake the vehicle will be much greater
than that required with the power system
operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
89 ft-lb
(120 N·m)
M12 x 1.25 x
25.5
17 mm
9
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly tightened.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see an authorized dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine
failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
1.3L TURBO ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded regular gasoline having an octane rating
of 87 using the (R+M)/2 method. For optimum
performance and fuel economy the use of
91 octane or higher is recommended.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner-burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
provide improved performance and durability of
engine and fuel system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and
fuel system deposits. When available,
the usage of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is
recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list
of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 291
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component corro-
sion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane
(LP) may result in damage to the engine,
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
that result from running CNG or LP are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasoline to increase
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
9
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
FLUID CAPACITIES
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some
light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of meth-
anol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1.3L Turbo 12.7 Gallons 48 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
1.3L Turbo 4.8 Quarts 4.5 Liters
Cooling System *
1.3L Turbo 8.8 Quarts 8.3 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 293
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-30 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-13340.
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-30 engine oil can be used but must have the
API Starburst trademark Ú page 242.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter
is unavailable, only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection
91 Octane (R+M)/2 Recommended, 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Acceptable, 0-15%
Ethanol.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
We recommend using Mopar® Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-90 (API GL-5).
Rear Differential Module (RDM)
We recommend using Mopar® Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-90 (API GL-5).
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend using Mopar® DOT 4.
DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every two years regardless of mileage.
9
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a
clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the items
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you
may obtain a rental at vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you
get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC's
authorized dealers have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason
you are still not satisfied, talk to the general
manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They
want to know if you need assistance. If an authorized
dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may
contact FCA US LLC's Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile and
office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (888) 242-6342
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 295
PUERTO RICO AND U.S. VIRGIN
I
SLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (888) 242-6342
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommu-
nication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its
customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired
customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs relay
service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers,
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay
Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed
by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection
beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a
Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive
Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in
the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the FCA US LLC’s Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA
US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
this vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/
om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain
its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either
the website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features.
They show exactly how to find and correct
problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and
a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA
vehicles.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 297
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through
Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
RADIO
The following regulatory statement applies to
RADIO devices equipped in this vehicle:
FCC ID: Y70VP2RFP
IC: 7812H-VP2RFP
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
RF Exposure Requirements
To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance
requirements, the device must be installed and
operated to provide a separation distance of at
least 20 cm from all persons.
This equipment complies with Canada radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed
and operated with minimum distance 20 cm
between the radiator and your body.
Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux rayonnements ISED établies pour
un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement
doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de
20 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement
et votre corps
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
Remarque: Les changements ou modifications
non expressément approuvés par la partie
responsable de la conformité peuvent annuler
l'autorisation de l'utilisateur à utiliser l'équi-
pement.
ACC and FCW
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. this device must not cause interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
10
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required
to correct the interference at his own expense
RF Radiation Exposure Information
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed
and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body. This
transmitter must not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d'exposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour un
environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement doit
être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 20 cm
de distance entre la source de rayonnement et
votre corps. Ce transmetteur ne doit pas être place
au même endroit ou utilise simultanément avec un
autre transmetteur ou antenne.
BSM
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Industry Canada's RSS - 310 . Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. this device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Cet appareil est conforme au RSS - 310 d 'Industrie
Canada. Le fonctionnement est soumis à la
condition que cet appareil ne provoque pas
d'interférences nuisibles et accepte toute
interférence, y compris les interférences
susceptibles de provoquer un fonctionnement
indésirable de l'appareil
CAUTION TO USERS
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the users authority to operate the equipment.
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
299
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes.........................................289
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control)............................................................ 94
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............248
Adding Fuel....................................................111
Adding Washing Fluid ....................................241
Additives, Fuel ...............................................290
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................160
Air Bag ...........................................................196
Air Bag Operation ......................................197
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................198
Enhanced Accident Response......... 201, 234
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................234
Front Air Bag .............................................196
If Deployment Occurs................................201
Knee Impact Bolsters................................197
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............204
Maintenance .............................................204
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............196
Side Air Bags .............................................198
Transporting Pets......................................215
Air Bag Light ..................................................215
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter) .............................................................243
Air Conditioner Maintenance .........................244
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........................... 244
Air Conditioner System ................................. 244
Air Conditioning................................................43
Air Conditioning Filter..............................49, 244
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.......................48
Air Filter ........................................................ 243
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................... 276
Alarm
Arm The System ..........................................21
Disarm The System .....................................21
Security Alarm ......................................21, 72
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ......................................90
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle........................................................... 9
Android Auto ........................................ 162, 164
Android Auto™
S
........................................ 162
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 248, 292
Disposal ................................................... 249
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 174
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................................72
Apple CarPlay....................................... 162, 165
Apple CarPlay® ¹ .......................................... 164
Assist, Hill Start............................................. 177
Audio Settings............................................... 148
Audio Systems (Radio).................................. 122
Auto Down Power Windows..............................53
Auto Up Power Windows ..................................53
Automatic Door Locks......................................24
Automatic Headlights.......................................37
Automatic High Beams.....................................37
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)..............48
Automatic Transmission......................... 85, 251
Adding Fluid.....................................251, 293
Fluid And Filter Change............................. 251
Fluid Change............................................. 251
Fluid Level Check...................................... 251
Fluid Type ........................................251, 293
Special Additives ...................................... 251
Axle Fluid....................................................... 293
Axle Lubrication ............................................ 293
B
Battery ................................................... 70, 241
Charging System Light.................................70
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................15
Belts, Seat .................................................... 215
Blind Spot Monitoring ................................... 178
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile
Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing..... 156
Body Mechanism Lubrication........................ 244
11
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300
B-Pillar Location.............................................273
Brake Assist System ......................................175
Brake Control System, Electronic ..................175
Brake Fluid ....................................................293
Brake System ...................................... 250, 289
Anti-Lock (ABS)..........................................289
Fluid Check ...............................................293
Master Cylinder .........................................250
Warning Light .............................................. 70
Brightness, Interior Lights................................39
Bulbs, Light....................................................216
C
Camera, Rear ................................................110
Capacities, Fluid ............................................292
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine)................................................240
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................249
Car Washes ...................................................286
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................. 216, 217
CD..................................................................150
Cellular Phone ...............................................173
Certification Label .........................................112
Chains, Tire....................................................283
Chart, Tire Sizing............................................270
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) ............................................................... 78
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..................214
Checks, Safety...............................................214
Child Restraint...............................................204
Child Restraints
Booster Seats........................................... 207
Child Seat Installation .............................. 213
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 211
Infant And Child Restraints....................... 206
LATCH Positions ....................................... 208
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 210
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children.. 208
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 206
Seating Positions...................................... 207
Cigar Lighter ....................................................52
Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 290
Cleaning
Wheels ..................................................... 282
Climate Control ................................................43
Clutch ........................................................... 250
Fluid ......................................................... 250
Coin Holder......................................................51
Cold Weather Operation ..................................80
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 280
Console............................................................51
Floor ............................................................51
Contract, Service .......................................... 295
Controls ........................................................ 142
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)............ 249
Cooling System ............................................. 247
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 248
Coolant Level............................................ 249
Cooling Capacity....................................... 292
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 249
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 248
Inspection........................................247, 249
Points To Remember ................................ 249
Pressure Cap ............................................ 249
Radiator Cap............................................. 249
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze).........................248, 292, 293
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 286
Cruise Control (Speed Control).........................93
Cruise Light...............................................76, 77
Customer Assistance .................................... 294
Customer Programmable Features ............... 123
Cybersecurity ................................................ 122
D
Daytime Running Lights ...................................36
Defroster, Rear Window ...................................42
Defroster, Windshield ................................... 215
De-Icer, Remote Start ......................................20
Deleting A Phone........................................... 156
Diagnostic System, Onboard............................78
Dimmer Switch
Headlight .....................................................36
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 241
Disabled Vehicle Towing ............................... 232
Disc Drive...................................................... 150
Disconnecting ............................................... 156
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
301
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant).......................249
Disturb...........................................................159
Door Ajar.......................................................... 71
Door Ajar Light................................................. 71
Door Locks
Automatic.................................................... 24
Remote Keyless Entry ................................. 22
Drag & Drop...................................................140
Driver Memory Presets ..................................147
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 26
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .....................................120
E
Electric Brake Control System .......................175
Anti-Lock Brake System.............................174
Traction Control System ............................178
Electric Park Brake .......................................... 82
Electric Parking Brake ..................................... 82
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet).........52
Electrical Power Outlets................................... 52
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...................176
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........ 71
Emergency Refueling.....................................229
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher............................218
Jacking ......................................................218
Jump Starting............................................226
Overheating.............................................. 229
Towing ...................................................... 232
Emission Control System Maintenance ...........78
Engine........................................................... 240
Air Cleaner................................................ 243
Break-In Recommendations........................82
Checking Oil Level .................................... 241
Compartment ........................................... 240
Coolant (Antifreeze).................................. 293
Cooling ..................................................... 247
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 216, 217
Fails To Start ...............................................81
Flooded, Starting .........................................81
Jump Starting ........................................... 226
Oil ...........................................242, 292, 293
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 240
Oil Filter .................................................... 243
Oil Selection .................................... 242, 292
Overheating.............................................. 229
Starting........................................................80
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature ................................................ 201, 234
Ethanol ......................................................... 291
Exhaust Gas Cautions.......................... 216, 217
Exhaust System ................................... 216, 246
Exterior Lighting...............................................36
Exterior Lights.........................................36, 216
F
Filters
Air Cleaner ................................................ 243
Air Conditioning ................................. 49, 244
Engine Oil ........................................ 243, 293
Engine Oil Disposal................................... 243
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................................ 218
Turn Signals................................ 38, 77, 216
Flash-To-Pass...................................................37
Flooded Engine Starting...................................81
Floor Console ...................................................51
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 292
Fluid Leaks.................................................... 216
Fluid Level Checks
Engine Oil ................................................. 241
Fluid, Brake................................................... 293
Fog Lights ........................................................38
Folding Rear Seats...........................................26
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle................................. 231
Front And Rear Park Assist System............... 102
Fuel............................................................... 290
Adding ...................................................... 111
Additives................................................... 290
Clean Air ................................................... 290
Ethanol ..................................................... 291
Gasoline ................................................... 290
11
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302
Gauge.......................................................... 73
Materials Added........................................290
Methanol...................................................291
Octane Rating ................................. 290, 293
Specifications............................................293
Tank Capacity............................................292
Full Brake Control System .............................182
Fuses.............................................................252
G
Gasoline, (Fuel) .............................................290
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................290
Gasoline, Reformulated.................................290
Gauges
Fuel ............................................................. 73
Gear Selector Override ..................................230
Glass Cleaning...............................................288
Gross Axle Weight Rating...............................113
GVWR ............................................................112
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or
Shallow Standing Water........................120
Hazard Warning Flashers ..............................218
Head Restraints............................................... 30
Headlights
Automatic.................................................... 37
Cleaning ....................................................286
Delay ........................................................... 37
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........36
Lights On Reminder.....................................37
Passing........................................................37
Switch..........................................................36
Time Delay...................................................37
Heated Mirrors.................................................35
Heated Seats...................................................29
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch ..............................................................36
Hill Start Assist.............................................. 177
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................................... 115
Holder, Coin .....................................................51
Hood Prop........................................................58
Hood Release ..................................................58
I
Ignition.............................................................17
Switch..........................................................17
Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................33
Instrument Cluster...........................................63
Display.........................................................64
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning................... 288
Interior Appearance Care.............................. 287
Interior Lights...................................................38
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................40
iPod/USB/MP3 Control....................................51
J
Jack Location ................................................ 219
Jack Operation .............................................. 220
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 220
Jump Starting................................................ 226
K
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm .............................................21
Disarm The Alarm ........................................21
Keyless Entry ...............................................23
Remote Keyless Entry..................................14
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) ...............................................................15
Keyless Enter 'n Go™
Enter The Trunk ...........................................23
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors................... 23, 132
Passive Entry ...............................................23
Passive Entry Programming.........................23
Remote Control............................................23
Unlock From The Driver’s Side.....................23
Unlock From The Passenger’s Side .............23
Keyless Entry ...................................................14
Keys .................................................................14
Replacement ...............................................16
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals ........................38
Lane Change Assist..........................................38
LaneSense.................................................... 108
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
303
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................................190
Latches..........................................................216
Hood ........................................................... 58
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................216
Life Of Tires ...................................................278
Liftgate ............................................................ 60
Closing ........................................................ 60
Opening....................................................... 60
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ....................... 42
Light Bulbs.....................................................216
Lighter
Cigar............................................................ 52
Lights.............................................................216
Adaptive Cruise Control............................... 72
Air Bag.......................................................215
Audio System .............................................. 72
Automatic Headlights.................................. 37
Brake Warning ............................................70
Coolant Temperature .................................. 70
Cruise................................................... 76, 77
Daytime Running......................................... 36
Dimmer Switch, Headlight........................... 36
Drive Mode.................................................. 73
Electric Power Steering ............................... 71
Electronic Park Brake.................................. 72
Electronic Stability Control ................... 72, 73
Exterior...............................................36, 216
Exterior Bulb................................................ 76
External Light .............................................. 73
Fog ....................................................... 38, 76
Fuel Cutoff...................................................76
Fuel Level ....................................................76
Full Brake Control........................................76
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 218
Headlight Switch..........................................36
Headlights ...................................................36
Headlights On Reminder .............................37
High Beam............................................36, 77
Hood Open ..................................................71
Icy Road Condition.......................................76
Immobilizer Fail ...........................................76
Instrument Cluster.......................................36
Intensity Control ..........................................39
Interior.........................................................38
LaneSense ....................................73, 76, 77
Light Sensor ................................................77
Lights On Reminder.....................................37
Loose Fuel Filler Cap ...................................73
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)..........73
Park.............................................................76
Passing........................................................37
Seat Belt Reminder .....................................71
Security Alarm .............................................72
Service ........................................................74
Service LaneSense......................................73
Service Stop Start........................................74
Speed ..........................................................77
StopStart Active...........................................77
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS).............. 185
Transmission Fault ......................................72
Transmission Temperature..........................75
Trunk Open..................................................72
Turn Signals................................ 38, 77, 216
Vanity Mirror ................................................33
Loading Vehicle............................................. 112
Tires.......................................................... 273
Locks
Automatic Door............................................22
Child Protection ...........................................24
Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 185
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 244
Lug Nuts/Bolts.............................................. 289
M
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 241
Maintenance Schedule ................................. 235
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .....73
Manual
Service...................................................... 296
Master Cylinder
Brakes ...................................................... 250
Media Mode.................................................. 150
Methanol....................................................... 291
Mirrors .............................................................33
Heated.........................................................35
Outside ........................................................34
Rearview......................................................33
Vanity...........................................................33
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle........................................................... 9
11
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.......................185
Mopar Parts...................................................296
MP3 Control .................................................... 51
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period............................ 82
O
Occupant Restraints......................................188
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 290, 293
Oil Change Indicator ........................................ 65
Reset........................................................... 65
Oil Filter, Change ...........................................243
Oil Filter, Selection.........................................243
Oil Pressure Light ............................................ 71
Oil, Engine ........................................... 242, 293
Capacity ....................................................292
Checking ...................................................241
Dipstick .....................................................241
Disposal ....................................................243
Filter................................................ 243, 293
Filter Disposal ...........................................243
Identification Logo.....................................242
Materials Added To ...................................243
Pressure Warning Light ............................... 71
Recommendation............................ 242, 292
Viscosity ....................................................292
Onboard Diagnostic System ............................ 78
Operating Precautions ..................................... 78
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual........................................ 296
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................34
Overheating, Engine...................................... 229
P
Paint Care..................................................... 286
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
S
..................................................... 154
Park Assist.................................................... 102
Park Assist System, Front And Rear.............. 102
Parking Brake ..................................................82
Personalized Main Menu Bar........................ 140
Pets .............................................................. 215
Phone Mode ................................................. 152
Pinch Protection ..............................................55
Placard, Tire And Loading Information.......... 273
Power
Brakes ...................................................... 289
Mirrors.........................................................34
Sunroof........................................................55
Power Folding Roof ..........................................57
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts.................. 193
Preparation For Jacking ................................ 218
Presets ......................................................... 147
R
Radial Ply Tires ............................................. 277
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ........... 249
Radio
Presets ..................................................... 147
Radio Controls .............................................. 142
Radio Mode................................................... 142
Radio Operation...................................142, 173
Radio Remote Controls ................................. 141
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...........................41
Rear Camera................................................. 110
Rear Cross Path ............................................ 181
Rear Seats, Folding..........................................26
Rear Window Defroster....................................42
Rear Wiper/Washer .........................................42
Recreational Towing...................................... 119
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 290
Refrigerant.................................................... 244
Release, Hood..................................................58
Reminder, Lights On ........................................37
Reminder, Seat Belt...................................... 189
Remote Control
Starting System ...........................................18
Remote Keyless Entry ......................................14
Arm The Alarm .............................................21
Disarm The Alarm ........................................21
Keyless Enter-N-Go......................................23
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control......... 141
Remote Starting
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features ..................................................20
Uconnect Settings .......................................20
Remote Starting System ..................................18
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
305
Replacement Keys........................................... 16
Replacement Tires.........................................279
Reporting Safety Defects...............................296
Restraints, Child ............................................204
Restraints, Head.............................................. 30
Roll Over Warning.............................................. 8
Rotation, Tires ...............................................284
S
Safety ............................................................140
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.........................215
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................216
Safety Defects, Reporting..............................296
Safety Features .............................................140
Safety Information, Tire .................................269
Safety Tips.....................................................214
Safety, Exhaust Gas.......................................216
Satellite Radio ...............................................143
Saved Radio Stations ....................................147
Schedule, Maintenance.................................235
Seat Belt Reminder ......................................... 71
Seat Belts ............................................ 189, 215
Adjustable Shoulder Belt...........................192
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage......192
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage.............................................192
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)............194
Child Restraints.........................................204
Front Seat .............................. 189, 190, 191
Inspection .................................................215
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 191
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 192
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 190
Operating Instructions.............................. 191
Pregnant Women...................................... 193
Rear Seat ................................................. 190
Reminder.................................................. 189
Untwisting Procedure ............................... 192
Seat Belts Maintenance ............................... 287
Seats ...............................................................26
Adjustment ..................................................26
Heated.........................................................29
Rear Folding ................................................26
Seatback Release .......................................26
Tilting...........................................................26
Security Alarm...........................................21, 72
Arm The System ..........................................21
Disarm The System .....................................21
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 293
Semi-Auto Kit................................................ 223
Sentry Key Replacement .................................16
Service Assistance........................................ 294
Service Contract ........................................... 295
Service Manuals ........................................... 296
Settings ........................................................ 123
Personal ................................................... 123
Settings, Audio.............................................. 148
Shift Lever Override ...................................... 230
Shoulder Belts .............................................. 190
Signals, Turn....................................38, 77, 216
Sirius Satellite Radio..................................... 143
Favorites................................................... 146
Replay....................................................... 145
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM.......................................... 146
Favorites................................................... 146
Replay....................................................... 145
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 283
Snow Tires .................................................... 280
Spare Tires...........................................280, 281
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline).......................................... 293
Oil ............................................................. 293
Speed Control
Distance Setting (ACC Only).........................94
Mode Setting (ACC Only)..............................94
Resume .......................................................94
Starting ............................................................80
Button..........................................................17
Cold Weather...............................................80
Engine Fails To Start....................................81
Remote........................................................18
Starting And Operating.....................................80
Starting Procedures .........................................80
Steering
Tilt Column...................................................25
Wheel, Heated .............................................25
Wheel, Tilt....................................................25
11
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......................141
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System .......141
Storage............................................................ 50
Storage, Vehicle...............................................49
Store Radio Presets.......................................147
Stuck, Freeing ...............................................231
Sun Roof.......................................................... 55
Closing ........................................................ 55
Opening....................................................... 55
Sun Visor Extension.........................................33
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag.....196
Sway Control, Trailer......................................114
System, Remote Starting................................. 18
T
Telescoping Steering Column .......................... 25
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............48
Tilt Steering Column ........................................ 25
Time Delay
Headlight..................................................... 37
Tip Start........................................................... 80
Tire And Loading Information Placard ...........273
Tire Markings.................................................269
Tire Safety Information ..................................269
Tire Service Kit ..............................................223
Tires...................................216, 276, 280, 285
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................278
Air Pressure...............................................276
Chains .......................................................283
Changing ...................................................218
Compact Spare......................................... 280
General Information ........................ 276, 280
High Speed............................................... 277
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 276
Life Of Tires .............................................. 278
Load Capacity........................................... 273
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..74, 185
Quality Grading......................................... 285
Radial ....................................................... 277
Replacement ............................................ 279
Rotation.................................................... 284
Safety .............................................. 269, 276
Sizes......................................................... 270
Snow Tires................................................ 280
Spare Tires ...................................... 280, 281
Spinning ................................................... 278
Trailer Towing ........................................... 117
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 278
Wheel Nut Torque..................................... 289
To Open Hood ..................................................58
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 116
Towing .......................................................... 113
Disabled Vehicle....................................... 232
Guide........................................................ 115
Recreational ............................................. 119
Weight ...................................................... 115
Towing Behind A Motorhome........................ 119
Towing Eyes .................................................. 232
Traction................................................ 119, 120
Traction Control ............................................ 178
Trailer Towing................................................ 113
Hitches ..................................................... 115
Minimum Requirements ........................... 116
Trailer And Tongue Weight........................ 116
Wiring ....................................................... 117
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 115
Trailer Weight................................................ 115
Transfer Case
Fluid.......................................................... 293
Transmission
Automatic .......................................... 85, 251
Fluid.......................................................... 293
Transporting Pets.......................................... 215
Tread Wear Indicators................................... 278
Turn Signals ..............................................38, 77
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features ................................. 157
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone ................................... 160
Uconnect Settings ............................. 20, 123
Uconnect Phone................................... 154, 155
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress ..................... 159
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress................ 158
Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 162
Call Continuation ...................................... 160
Call Controls ............................................. 158
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
307
Call Termination ........................................160
Cancel Command......................................154
Connecting To A Particular Mobile
Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing .....156
Help Command .........................................154
Join Calls ...................................................159
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Favorite.................................................156
Making A Second Call While Current Call
Is In Progress ........................................159
Managing Your Favorites...........................157
Natural Speech .........................................154
Operation ..................................................153
Overview....................................................152
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone ...................................................154
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device..155
Phonebook Download ...............................157
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ...............159
Power-Up...................................................162
Recent Calls ..............................................158
Redial........................................................160
To Remove A Favorite ...............................157
Toggling Between Calls .............................159
Touch-Tone Number Entry.........................158
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ..160
Voice Command ........................................160
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable
Features............................... 20, 123, 132
Passive Entry Programming...................... 132
Uconnect System.......................................... 138
Uniform Tire Quality Grades.......................... 285
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................... 192
USB..................................................................51
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................33
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 289
Vehicle Loading ................................... 112, 273
Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 242
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations...................... 9
Vehicle Storage................................................49
Voice Command............................ 32, 164, 165
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................32
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard............................. 218
Warnings, Roll Over ........................................... 8
Warranty Information.................................... 295
Washer
Adding Fluid.............................................. 241
Washing Vehicle............................................ 286
Water
Driving Through ........................................ 120
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care........................... 282
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 282
Wind Buffeting .................................................54
Window Fogging...............................................49
Windows ..........................................................53
Windshield Defroster .................................... 215
Windshield Washers ........................................40
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 245
Windshield Wipers ...........................................40
Wipers Blade Replacement........................... 245
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................40
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................41
Wrecker Towing............................................. 232
11
22_FD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an
accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices,
by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never
be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location
and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new FIAT
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference
source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada)
or your local FIAT
®
brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the
legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are
known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To
minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your
vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your
vehicle. For more information go to .
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual
may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specications, and/
or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet
by calling or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting .
If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling or by contacting your dealer.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an
accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your FIAT
®
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select
your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “FIAT” (U.S.
residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL AND WARRANTY BOOK
mopar.com/om
U. S.
owners.mopar.ca
Canada
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used under
license by FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
First Edition
22_FD_OM_EN_USC
2022 OWNER’S MANUAL
